Electrical Systems Upgrades Bid PackageVILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADES
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
1200 OAK BROOK ROAD
OAK BROOK, ILLINOIS
60523
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
1200 OAK BROOK ROAD
OAK BROOK, ILLINOIS
60523
ARCHITECT
KLUBER ARCHITECTS + ENGINEERS
10 S. SHUIAWAY AVE.
BATAVIA, ILLINOIS
60510
DATE: NOVEMBER 11, 2016
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
BID PACKAGE
1. Invitation for Bidder's Proposals
2. General Instructions to Bidders
3. Bidder's Proposal
4. Bidder's Sworn Acknowledgement
5. Bidder's Sworn Work History Statement
6. Notice of Award
7. Contract
Contractor's Certification
Attachment A: Supplemental Schedule of Contract Terms
Attachment B; Specifications
Attachment C: List of Drawings
Attachment D: Special Project Requirements
Appendix 1: Prevailing Wages
Appendix 2: Form of Performance Bond
Appendix 3: Form of Labor and Materials Bond
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
BID PACKAGE
INVITATION FOR BIDDER'S PROPOSALS
OWNER: Village of Oak Brook
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
1. Invitation to Bid
Owner invites sealed Bidder's Proposals for the Work described in detail in the Contract
and generally described as follows:
Provide and install all materials needed for the Electrical Systems Upgrade as shown on the
drawings and described herein. The general contractor shall provide and install all materials,
unless noted otherwise.
The Work shall be performed at the following Work Site:
Butler Government Center, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
2. The Bid Package
The Bid Package consists of the following documents, all of which are by this reference
made a part of this Invitation for Bidder's Proposals as though fully set forth herein:
A. Invitation for Bidder's Proposals;
B. General Instructions to Bidders;
C. Addenda, if any are issued during the bidding process;
D. Bidder's Proposal;
E. Bidder's Sworn Acknowledgement;
F. Bidder's Sworn Work History Statement;
G. Other information submitted by Bidder, if requested during the bidding process;
INVITATION
H. Notice of Award; and
I. Contract, including all of its attachments and appendices, if any.
4. inspection and Examination
Bid Documents may be obtained in two ways:
1. Via the Internet at www.oal,,-brook.org at no charge.
2. A paper hard copy may be obtained in person from Owner's Purchasing Division,
Butler Government Center, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523.
The Bid Package may be examined at the office of Owner as listed above. In malting
copies of the Bid Package available to prospective Bidders, Owner does so only for the purpose
of obtaining Bidder's Proposals and such provision does not confer a license or grant for any
other use.
Each prospective Bidder shall, before submitting its Bidder's Proposal, carefully examine
the Bid Package. Each prospective Bidder shall inspect in detail the Work Site and the
surrounding area and shall familiarize itself with all local conditions, including subsurface,
underground and other concealed conditions, affecting the Contract, the Work and the Work Site.
The Bidder whose Bidder's Proposal is accepted will be responsible for all errors in its Bidder's
Proposal including those resulting from its failure or neglect to make a thorough examination and
investigation of the Bid Package and the conditions of the Work Site and the surrounding area.
The Contract specifications may include the Illinois Department of Transportation's
General Conditions of the Contract, "State of Illinois Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction" (SSRB); "Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Main Construction
in Illinois" (SSWS); "Illinois Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and
Highways" (MUTCD). The specifications also may include Owners' Village Code and Building
Code. References to any of these manuals, codes, and specifications means the latest editions
effective on the date of the bid opening.
5. Pre -Bid Meetin
Every prospective bidder is required to attend a Pre-bid Meeting and Walk-Thru
scheduled for 10:00 A.M., Wednesday Decembcr 7, 2016, at the Butler Government Center,
beginning in the S.E. Dean Board Room, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523,
to review the scope of the improvements and the project specifications. Failure to attend this
mandatory meeting will disqualify the bidder.
-2-
INVITATION
6. Bid Opening
Owner will receive sealed Bidder's Proposals for the Work until 10:00 a.m., local time,
Wednesday, December 14, 2016, in the Samuel E. Dean Board Room, at the Butler
Government Center located at 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523, at which time,
or as soon thereafter as possible, all Bidder's Proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud.
Bidders or their agents are invited to be present.
7. Bid Security,.Bonds and Insurance
A. Bid Security. Each Bidder's Proposal shall be accompanied by a security deposit
of at least 5 percent of the Bidder's Price Proposal in the form of (1) a Cashier's Check or
Certified Check drawn on a solvent bank insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation
and payable without condition to Owner or (2) a Bid Bond in a form satisfactory to Owner fi•om
a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Illinois with a general rating of A minus
and a financial size category of Class X or better in Best's Insurance Guide.
B. Performance and Pa ent Bonds. The successful Bidder will be required to
furnish a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond on award of the Contract,
each in the penal sum of the full amount of the Contract Price, on forms provided by, or
otherwise acceptable to, Owner, from a surety company meeting the requirements set forth
above. Each Bidder's Proposal must be accompanied by a letter from such a surety company
stating that it will execute Bonds on forms provided by, or otherwise acceptable to, Owner, on
award of the Contract to Bidder.
C. Insurance. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish certificates of
insurance as required by Section 4.2 of the Contract on award of the Contract. Each Bidder's
Proposal must be accompanied by a letter from Bidder's insurance carrier or its agent certifying
that said insurer has read the requirements set forth in the Contract and will 'issue the required
certificates and policies of insurance on award of the Contract to Bidder.
DATED: November 30, 2016
Village of Oak Brook
Charlotte K. Pruss
Village Clerk
-3-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
BID PACKAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1.
Interpretation of Documents Included in Bid Package
........................................................1
2.
Calculation of Unit Price Proposals.....................................................................................2
3.
Prevailing Wages.................................................................................................................2
4.
Taxes and Benefits...............................................................................................................2
5.
Permits and Licenses............................................................................................................2
6.
Preparation of Bidder's Proposal.........................................................................................3
7.
Signature Requirements.......................................................................................................3
8.
Bid Security.........................................................................................................................4
9.
Submission of Bidder's Proposals.......................................................................................5
10.
Withdrawal of Bidder's Proposals.......................................................................................5
11.
Qualification of Bidders.......................................................................................................5
12.
Disqualification of Bidders..................................................................................................6
13.
Award of Contract................................................................................................................6
14.
Notice of Award; Effective Date of Award.........................................................................7
15.
Finalization of Contract.......................................................................................................7
16.
Failure to Execute................................................................................................................8
-1-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
BID PACKAGE
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Interpretation of Documents Included in Bid Package
A. Defined Terns. All terms capitalized in these General Instructions to Bidders and
in the other documents included in the Bid Package are defined in the documents included in the
Bid Package and shall have such defined meanings wherever used.
B. Implied Terms. If any personnel, equipment, materials, or supplies that are not
directly or indirectly set forth in the Contract are nevertheless necessary to the proper provision,
performance, and completion of the whole of the Work in accordance with the intent of the
Contract, each prospective Bidder shall understand such personnel, equipment, materials, or
supplies to be implied and shall provide for such personnel, equipment, materials, or supplies in
its Bidder's Proposal as fully as if it were particularly described.
C. Information Provided by Owner. When information pertaining to subsurface,
underground or other concealed conditions, soils analysis, borings, test pits, utility locations or
conditions, buried structures, condition of existing structures, and other preliminary
investigations is distributed with the Bid Package, or such information is otherwise made
available to any prospective Bidder by Owner, such information is distributed or made available
solely for the convenience of such prospective Bidder and is not part of the Bid Package. Owner
assumes no responsibility whatever in respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of any such
information, and there is no guaranty or warranty, either expressed or implied, that the conditions
indicated are representative of those existing throughout the Work or the Work Site, or that the
conditions indicated are representative of those existing at any particular location, or that
unanticipated conditions may not be present.
D. Addenda. No interpretation of the documents included within the Bid Package
will be made except by written addendum duly issued by Owner ("Addendum"). No
interpretation not contained in an Addendum shall be valid or have any force or effect whatever,
nor entitle any Bidder to assert any claim or demand against Owner on account thereof.
All Addenda issued prior to the opening of Bidder's Proposals shall become a part of the Bid
Package. Each prospective Bidder shall be responsible for inquiring from time to time as ,to the
availability of Addenda.
4-
INSTRUCTIONS
If any prospective Bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the Bid Package, such
prospective Bidder shall submit to Owner a written request for an interpretation thereof as far in
advance of the scheduled opening of Bidder's Proposals as possible.
Owner shall use its best efforts to issue Addenda in response to all valid, appropriate, and timely
inquiries, but accepts no responsibility for doing so. Inquiries not answered by Addenda shall be
considered invalid, inappropriate, or untimely inquiries.
2. Calculation of Unit Price Pro osals
On all items for which Bidder's Proposals are to be received on a unit price basis, the
approximate quantities stated in the Schedule of Prices are Owner's estimate only for Owner's
convenience in comparing Bidder's Proposals and shall not be relied on by Prospective Bidders.
Each prospective Bidder shall, before submitting its Bidder's Proposal, mala its own estimate of
the quantities of Unit Price Items required to complete the Work.
3. Prevailing Wages
In accordance with the Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 13010.01 et seq., not less than the
prevailing rate of wages for similar work in the locality in which the Work is to be performed
shall be paid to all laborers. Specific provisions relating to the Prevailing Wage Act, and
required of the Contractor, are included in the Contract. A copy of Owner's ordinance
ascertaining the prevailing rate of wages in effect as of the date of the Invitation for Bidder's
Proposals, is included in the Bid Package. If the Illinois Department of Labor revises the
prevailing rate of hourly wages to be paid, the revised rate shall apply to the Contract.
4. Taxes and Benefits
Owner is exempt from state and local sales, use, and excise taxes. Bidder's Price
Proposal shall not include any such taxes. A letter of exemption will be provided to the
successful Bidder, if necessary. Owner will not reimburse, nor assist the successful Bidder in
obtaining reimbursement for, any state or local sales, use or excise taxes paid by the successful
Bidder.
Bidder's Price Proposal shall include all other applicable federal, state, and local taxes of
every kind or nature applicable to the Work as well as all taxes, contributions, and premiums for
unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits, pensions, annuities or other similar
benefits.
5. Permits and Licenses
Except as otherwise expressly provided in Attachment A to the Contract, Bidder's Price
Proposal shall include the cost of obtaining all permits, licenses, and other approvals and
authorizations required by law for performance of the Work. It shall be the sole responsibility of
each prospective Bidder to determine the applicable permits, licenses, and other approvals and
-2-
INSTRUCTIONS
authorizations and no extra compensation shall be paid by Owner for the successful Bidder's
failure to include these costs in its Bidder's Proposal.
6. Preparation of Bidder's Pro oral
Bidder's Proposals to enter into the Contract for the Work shall be made only on the
blank Bidder's Proposal form furnished by Owner and included in the Bid Package.
The Village requests that proposals are written legibly in ink. In case of any conflict
between words and numbers, words shall prevail. In case of any error in adding or multiplying
individual items, the prices listed for individual items shall control over any incorrect total of
such items. A Bidder's Proposal may be rejected if it does not contain a requested price for each
and every item named in the Bidder's Proposal form or may be interpreted as bidding "no
charge" to Owner for any item left blank.
Prospective Bidders are warned against making alterations of any kind to the Bidder's
Proposal form or to any entry thereon. Bidder's Proposals that contain omissions, conditions,
alterations, or additions not called for may be rejected or interpreted so as to be most favorable to
Owner.
Each Bidder shall securely staple into its Bidder's Proposal a copy of each Addendum
issued and shall include in the place provided therefor in the Bidder's Proposal form a listing of
all such Addenda.
Each Bidder shall complete and securely staple into its Bidder's Proposal the Bidder's
Sworn Acknowledgement and the Bidder's Sworn Work History Statement included in the Bid
Package, and shall staple into its Bidder's Proposal the Bid Security and the surety and insurance
commitment letters as specified in the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals,
Every Bidder submitting a Bidder's Proposal shall be conclusively deemed to have
evidenced an intention to be bound thereby whether or not the requirements for signing Bidder's
Proposals found in Section 7 of these General Instructions to Bidders are satisfied. However,
any Bidder's Proposal that fails to comply with Section 7 of these General Instructions to
Bidders may nevertheless be rejected.
Bidder's Proposals that are not submitted on the Bidder's Proposal form furnished by
Owner or that are not prepared in accordance with these General Instructions to Bidders may be
rejected. If a deficiently prepared Bidder's Proposal is not rejected, Owner may demand
correction of any deficiency and award the Contract to Bidder on satisfactory compliance with
these General Instructions to Bidders.
7. Signature Requirements
A. Bidder's Proposals. The following requirements shall be observed in the signing
of each Bidder's Proposal:
-3-
INSTRUCTIONS
(1) Corporations. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by a corporation shall be
signed by the President or other authorized officer of the corporation and
shall also bear the attesting signature of the Secretary or Assistant
Secretary of the corporation.
(2) Partnerships. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by a partnership shall be
signed by all of its general partners or by an attorney-in-fact.
(3) Individuals. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by an individual shall be
signed by such individual or by an attorney-in-fact.
(4) Joint Ventures. Each Bidder's Proposal submitted by a joint venture shall
be signed by each signatory of the joint venture agreement by which such
joint venture was formed in accordance with the applicable provisions of
(1), (2), and (3) above or by an attorney-in-fact.
When requested by Owner, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the person or persons
signing on behalf of Bidder shall be furnished.
B. Other Documents. The signature requirements set forth in Subsection 7A shall
apply to all other documents in the Bid Package required to be executed by Bidder, Bidder's
sureties and Bidder's insurance representatives as well as to the Contract, the Contractor's
Certification, and all other required documentation related to the Contract.
8. Bid Securi
A. Required Bid Seciuty. Every Bidder's Proposal shall be accompanied by bid
security in the form of a Cashier's Check, Certified Check or Bid Bond as specified in the
Invitation for Bidder's Proposals (`Bid Security"), which Bid Security shall stand as a guaranty
that (1) Bidder will submit all additional information requested by Owner; (2) if such Bidder's
Proposal is accepted, Bidder will timely file the Bonds and the certificates and policies of
insurance required by the Contract; and (3) if such Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder will
timely execute the Contract, the Contractor's Certification, and all other required documentation
related to the Contract.
B. Return of Bid Security. Bid Security submitted in the form of Cashier's Checks
or Certified Checks will be returned within rive days after execution of the Contract by Owner.
Bid Bonds will not be returned unless otherwise requested by Bidder.
C. Liquidated Damages. If a Bidder fails to timely submit all additional information
requested by Owner, or if the successful Bidder fails to timely and properly submit all required
Bonds, certificates and policies of insurance, or if the successful Bidder fails to timely and
properly execute the Contract, the Contractor's Certification, and all other required
documentation related to the Contract, it will be difficult and impracticable to ascertain and
determine the amount of damage that Owner will sustain by reason of any such failure. For such
reason, every Bidder shall, by submitting its Bidder's Proposal, be deemed to agree that Owner
-4-
INSTRUCTIONS
shall have the right, at its option in the event of any such default, to retain or recover as
reasonably estimated liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the entire amount of the Bid
Security or five percent of the Bidder's Price Proposal, whichever is greater, or to exercise any
and all equitable remedies it may have against the defaulting Bidder.
9. Submission of Bidder's Pro osal
One copy of each Bidder's Proposal, properly signed, together with all other required
documents, shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope or package and shall be addressed and
delivered to the place, before the time, and in the manner designated in the Invitation for
Bidder's Proposals. All Bidder's Proposals received after the time for the opening of bids
specified in the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals will be re
Each sealed envelope or package containing a Bidder's Proposal shall be identified as
such and shall be marked with the title of the Contract and Bidder's full legal name. All
Addenda will be considered part of each Bidder's Proposal whether attached or not.
10. Withdrawal of Bidder's Pro osal
Any Bidder's Proposal may be withdrawn at any time prior to the opening of any
Bidder's Proposal, provided that a request in writing, executed by Bidder in the manner specified
in Section 7 of these General Instructions to Bidders, for the withdrawal of such Bidder's
Proposal is filed with Owner prior to the opening of any Bidder's Proposal. The withdrawal of a
Bidder's Proposal prior to opening of any Bidder's Proposal will not prejudice the right of
Bidder to file a new Bidder's Proposal.
No Bidder's Proposal shall be withdrawn without the consent of Owner for a period of
60 days after the opening of any Bidder's Proposal. Any Bidder's Proposal may be withdrawn at
any time following the expiration of said 60 day period, provided that a request in writing,
executed by Bidder in the manner specified in Section 7 of these General Instructions to Bidders,
for the withdrawal of such Bidder's Proposal is filed with Owner after said 60 day period. If no
such request is filed, the date for acceptance of such Bidder's Proposal shall be deemed to be
extended until such a request is filed or until Owner executes a Contract pursuant to the
Invitation for Bidder's Proposals or until Ower affinnatively and in writing rejects such
Bidder's Proposal.
11. Qualification of Bidders
A. Factors. Owner intends to award the Contract only to a Bidder that furnishes
satisfactory evidence that it has the requisite experience, ability, capital, facilities, plant,
organization and staffing to enable it to perforin the Work successfully and promptly and to
complete the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time.
B. Additional Information. Owner reserves the right to require from any Bidder,
prior to award of the Contract, a detailed statement regarding the business and technical
organizations and plant of Bidder that is available for the Work. Information pertaining to
-5-
INSTRUCTIONS
financial resources, experience of personnel, contract defaults, litigation history, and pending
construction projects may also be requested.
C. Final Determination. The final selection of the successful Bidder shall be made
on the basis of the amount of the Bidder's Price Proposals, Owner's prior experience with the
Bidders, Owner's knowledge of the Bidders' performance on other relevant projects, any
additional information submitted by Bidders to satisfy Owner that Bidders are adequately
prepared to fulfill the Contract, and all other relevant facts or matters mentioned in the Bid
Package or that Owner may legally consider in making its deteimination.
12. Disqualifications of Bidders
A. More Than One Bidder's Proposal. No more than one Bidder's Proposal for the
Work described in the Contract shall be considered from any single corporation, partnership,
individual or joint venture, whether under the same or different names and whether or not in
conjunction with any other corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture. Reasonable
grounds for believing that any corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture is interested in
more than one Bidder's Proposal for the Work may cause the rejection of all Bidder's Proposals
in which such corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture is interested. Nothing
contained in this Subsection 12A shall prohibit any single corporation, partnership, individual or
joint venture, whether under the same or different names and whether or not in conjunction with
any other corporation, partnership, individual or joint venture, from submitting a bid or quoting
prices to more than one Bidder for equipment, materials and supplies or labor to be furnished as
a subcontractor or supplier.
B. Collusion. If there are reasonable grounds for believing that collusion exists
among any Bidders, all Bidder's Proposals of the participants in such collusion will not be
considered.
C. Default. If a Bidder is or has been in default on a contract with Owner or in the
payment of monies due Owner, its Bidder's Proposal will not be considered.
13. Award of Contract
A. Reservation of Rights. Owner reserves the right to accept the Bidder's Proposal
that is, in its judgment, the best and most favorable to the interests of Owner and the public; to
reject the low Price Proposal; to accept any item of any Bidder's Proposal; to reject any and all
Bidder's Proposals; to accept and incorporate corrections, clarifications or modifications
following the opening of the Bidder's Proposals when to do so would not, in Owner's opinion,
prejudice the bidding process or create any improper advantage to any Bidder; and to waive
irregularities and informalities in the bidding process or in any Bidder's Proposal submitted;
provided, however, that the waiver of any prior defect or informality shall not be considered a
waiver of any future or similar defects or informalities, and Bidders should not rely on, or
anticipate, such waivers in submitting their Bidder's Proposals.
-6-
INSTRUCTIONS
B. Firm Offers. All Bidder's Proposals are firm offers to enter into the Contract and
no Bidder's Proposals shall be deemed rejected, notwithstanding acceptance of any other
Bidder's Proposal, until the Contract has been executed by both Owner and the successful Bidder
or until Owner affirmatively and in writing rejects such Bidder's Proposal.
C. Time of Award. It is expected that the award of the Contract, if it is awarded, will
be made within 45 days following the opening of the Bidder's Proposals. Should administrative
difficulties be encountered after the opening of the Bidder's Proposals, including the annulment
of any award, that may delay an award or subsequent award beyond such 45 day period, Owner
may accept any Bidder's Proposal for which the date for acceptance has been extended as
provided in Section 10 of these General Instructions to Bidders in order to avoid the need for re -
advertisement. No Bidder shall be under any obligation to extend the date for acceptance of its
Bidder's Proposal. Failure of one or more of the Bidders or their sureties to extend the date for
acceptance of its Bidder's Proposal shall not prejudice the right of Owner to accept any Bidder's
Proposal for which the date for acceptance has been extended.
14. Notice of Award; Effective Date of Award
If the Contract is awarded by Owner, such award shall be effective when a Notice of
Award in the form included in the Bid Package has been delivered to the successful Bidder
("Effective Date of Award"). Owner will prepare two copies of the Contract based on Bidder's
Proposal and will submit them to the successful Bidder with the Notice of Award.
15. Finalization of Contract
A. Finalization Date. Unless otherwise stated in the Notice of Award, the successful
Bidder shall satisfactorily complete all conditions precedent to signing the Contract before the
10th day after the Effective Date of Award or within such extended period as Owner may, in the
exercise of its sole discretion, authorize in writing after issuance of the Notice of Award
("Finalization Date").
B. Conditions Precedent to Finalization. On or before the Finalization Date, the
successful Bidder shall: (1) sign (see Section 7), date as of the Finalization Date, and submit to
Owner both copies of the Contract, the Contractor's Certification, and all other required
documentation related to the Contract on or before the Finalization Date; and (2) submit two
executed copies of all required Bonds dated as of the Finalization Date and all certificates and
policies of insurance.
Failure to timely execute or submit any of the aforesaid documents shall be grounds for the
imposition of liquidated damages as more specifically set forth in Section 8 above. If the
submitted documents or any of then. fail to comply with these General Instructions to Bidders or
the Contract or are not timely executed and submitted, Owner may, in its sole discretion, annul
the award or allow the successful Bidder an opportunity to correct the deficiencies.
-7-
INSTRUCTIONS
In no event will Owner execute the Contract until any and all such deficiencies have been cured
or Owner has received adequate assurances, as determined by Owner, of complete and prompt
performance.
C. Finalization. On the Finalization Date, and provided that all documents required
to be submitted prior to or on the Finalization Date have been reviewed and determined by
Owner to be in compliance with these General Instructions to Bidders and the Contract, or
assurances of complete and prompt performance satisfactory to Owner have been received,
Owner shall execute all copies of the Contract and tender one copy to the successful Bidder at
the Finalization. The successful Bidder shall tender a copy to its surety company or companies.
15. Failure to ]Finalize
A. Annulment of Award; Liquidated Damages. The failure or refusal of a successful
Bidder to comply with the conditions precedent to finalization or to properly finalize and execute
the Contract shall be just cause for the annulment of the award and the imposition of liquidated
damages or the exercise of equitable remedies, both as more specifically set forth in Section 8
above.
B. Subsequent Awards. On annulment of an award, Owner may accept, and award a
Contract based on, any other Bidder's Proposal as Owner, in its sole judgment, deems to be the
best or may invite new Proposals or may abandon the bidding process or the Work.
-8-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
Full Name of Bidder
Principal Office Address
Local Office Address
Contact Person
BID PACKAGE
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
Telephone
TO: Village of Oak Brook ("Owner")
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook, IL 60523
Attention: Rania Serences, Senior Purchasing Assistant
PROPOSAL
idder")
Bidder warrants and represents that Bidder has carefully examined the Work Site described
below and its environs and has reviewed and understood all documents included, referred to, or
mentioned in this set of documents, including Addenda Nos. , which are securely
stapled to the end of this Bidder's Proposal [if none, write "NONE"] ("Bid Package").
Bidder acknowledges and agrees that all teems capitalized in this Bidder's Proposal shall have
the meaning given to them in the documents included in the Bid Package.
1. Work Proposal
A. Contract and Work. If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder proposes, and
agrees, that Bidder will contract with Owner, in the form of the Contract included in the Bid
Package: (1) to provide, perform and complete at the site or sites described in the Bid Package
("Work Site") and in the manner described and specified in the Bid Package all necessary work,
labor, services, transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas,
electric, water, waste disposal, information, data and other means and items necessary for the
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE as shown on the drawings and described herein. The
general contractor shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise; (2) to procure
and furnish all permits, licenses and other govermnental approvals and authorizations necessary
in connection therewith except as otherwise expressly provided in Attachment A to the Contract
included in the Bid Package; (3) to procure and furnish all Bonds and all certificates and policies
of insurance specified in the Bid Package; (4) to pay all applicable federal, state and local taxes;
(5) to do all other things required of Contractor by the Contract; and (6) to provide, perform and
N
PROPOSAL
complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner and in full compliance with,
and as required by or pursuant to, the Contract; all of which is herein referred to as the "Work."
B. Manner and Time of Performance. If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder
proposes, and agrees, that Bidder will perform the Work in the manner and time prescribed in the
Bid Package and according to the requirements of Owner pursuant thereto.
C. General. If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder proposes, and agrees, that
Bidder will do all other things required of Bidder or Contractor, as the case may be, by the Bid
Package.
2. Contract Price Proposal
If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder will, except as otherwise provided in
Section 2.1 of the Contract, take in full payment for all Work and other matters set fol -11 under
Section 1 above, including overhead and profit; taxes, contributions, and premiums; and
compensation to all subcontractors and suppliers, the compensation set forth on the following
"Schedule of Prices" ("Price Proposal"), which Schedule of Prices Bidder understands and
agrees will be made a part of the Contract:
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT
1. Provide and install all materials needed for the Electrical Systems Upgrade as
indicated in the drawings and described herein. For providing, performing, and
completing Work, the total Contract Price of :
E9
In words
B. BASIS FOR DETERMINING PRICES
It is expressly understood and agreed that:
1. [Deleted]
2. Owner is not subject to state or local sales, use and excise taxes and no such taxes are
included in this Schedule of Prices;
-10-
PROPOSAL
All other applicable federal, state, and local taxes of every kind and nature applicable to
the Work as well as all taxes, contributions, and premiums for unemployment insurance,
old age or retirement benefits, pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits are included
in this Schedule of Prices; and
4. All costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work
of patented equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or
inventions are included in this Schedule of Prices.
3. Contract Time Proposal
If this Bidder's Proposal is accepted, Bidder will commence the Work not later than the
"Commencement Date" set forth in Attachment A to the Contract and will perform the Work
diligently and continuously and will complete the Work not later than the "Completion Date" set
forth in Attachment A to the Contract.
4. Firm Proposal
All prices and other terms stated in this Bidder's Proposal are firm and shall not be
subject to withdrawal, escalation, or change for a period of 60 days after the date on which any
Bidder's Proposal is opened or such extended acceptance date for Bidder's Proposals as may be
established pursuant to Sections 10 and 13 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
5. Bidder Representations
A. No Collusion. Bidder warrants and represents that the only persons, firms, or
corporations interested in this Bidder's Proposal as principals are those named in Bidder's Sworn
Acknowledgment attached hereto and that this Bidder's Proposal is made without collusion with
any other person, firm or corporation.
B. Not Barred. Bidder warrants, represents and certifies that it is not barred by law
from contracting with Owner or with any unit of state or local government.
C. Qualified. Bidder warrants and represents that Bidder has the requisite
experience, ability, capital, facilities, plant, organization and staff to enable Bidder to perform
the Work successfully and promptly and to commence and complete the Work within the
Contract Price and Contract Time Proposals set forth above. In support thereof, Bidder submits
the attached Sworn Work History Statement. In the event Bidder is preliminarily deemed to be
one of the most favorable to the interests of Owner, Bidder hereby agrees to furnish on request,
within two business days or such longer• period as may be set forth in the request, such additional
information as may be necessary to satisfy Owner that Bidder is adequately prepared to fulfill the
Contract.
D. Owner's Reliance. Bidder acknowledges that Owner is relying on all warranties,
representations and statements made by Bidder in this Bidder's Proposal.
-11-
PROPOSAL
6. Surety and Insurance
Bidder herewith tenders surety and insurance commitment letters as specified in
Section 6 of the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals.
7. Bid Secures
Bidder herewith tenders a Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond as specified in
Section 6 of the Invitation for Bidder's Proposals for 5 percent of Bidder's Price Proposal ("Bid
Security').
8. Owner's Remedies
Bidder acknowledges and agrees that should Bidder fail to timely submit all additional
information that is requested of it; or should Bidder, if Owner awards Bidder the Contract, fail to
timely submit all the Bonds and all the certificates and policies of insurance required of it; or
should Bidder, if Owner awards Bidder the Contract, fail to timely execute the Contract,
Contractor's Certification and all other required documentation related to the Contract, it will be
difficult and impracticable to ascertain and determine the amount of damage that Owner will
sustain by reason of any such failure and, for such reason, Owner shall have the right, at its
option in the event of any such default by Bidder, to retain or recover as reasonably estimated
liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the entire amount of the Bid Security or five percent of
Bidder's Price Proposal, whichever is greater, or to exercise any and all equitable remedies it
may have against Bidder.
9. Owner's Rights
Bidder acknowledges and agrees that Owner reserves the right to reject any and all
Bidder's Proposals, reserves the right to accept or reject any item of any Bidder's Proposal and
reserves such other rights as are set forth in Section 13 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
-I2-
PROPOSAL
10. Bidder's Obligations
In submitting this Bidder's Proposal, Bidder understands and agrees that it shall be bound
by each and every term, condition or provision contained in the Bid Package, which are by this
reference incorporated herein and made a part hereof.
DATED: , 2016
Bidder
C
Title:
Attest
In
Title:
SEE GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, SECTION 7,
FOR SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS
-13-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
BID PACKAGE
BIDDER'S SWORN ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
{"Deponen("}, being first duly sworn on oath,
deposes and states that the undersigned Bidder is organized as indicated below and that all
statements herein made are made on behalf of such Bidder in support of its Bidder's Proposal for
the above Contract and that Deponent is authorized to make them.
Deponent also deposes and states that Bidder has carefully prepared, reviewed and
checked its Bidder's Proposal and that the statements contained in its Bidder's Proposal and in
this Acknowledgement are true and correct.
COMPLETE APPLICABLE SECTION ONLY
1. Corporation
Bidder is a corporation that is organized and existing under the laws of the State of
, that is qualified to do business in the State of Illinois, and that is operating under
the legal name of
The officers of the corporation are as follows:
TITLE NAME ADDRESS
President
Vice President
Secretary
Treasurer
2. Partnership
Bidder is a partnership that is organized, existing and registered under the laws of the
State of pursuant to that certain Partnership Agreement dated as of
that is qualified to do business in the State of Illinois, and that is operating
under the legal name of
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The general partners of the partnership are as follows:
NAME ADDRESS
3. Individual
Bidder is an individual as follows:
Full name:
Residence address:
Business address:
If operating under a trade or assumed
name that name is:
4. Joint Venture
Bidder is a joint venture that is organized and existing under the laws of the State of
pursuant to that certain Joint Venture Agreement dated as of , that is
qualified to do business in the State of Illinois, and that is operating under the legal name of
The signatories to the aforesaid Joint Venture Agreement are as follows:
NAME (and ENTITY TYPE_ ADDRESS
M,
[For each signatory, indicate type of entity (Corporation = "C"; Partnership = "P"; and Individual
= "I") and provide, on separate sheets, the information required in Paragraph 1, 2, or 3 above, as
applicable]
-2-
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
DATED: , 20
Bidder
By:
Title:
Attest
01
Title:
Subscribed and Sworn to before me on , 20
Notary Public
My commission expires: , 20
SEE GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, SECTION 7,
FOR SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS
-3-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
BID PACKAGE
BIDDER'S SWORN WORK HISTORY STATEMENT
("Deponent"), being first duly sworn on
oath, deposes and states that all statements made in this Sworn Work History Statement are made
on behalf of the undersigned Bidder in support of its Bidder's Proposal for the above Contract
and that Deponent is authorized to make them.
Deponent also deposes and states that Bidder has carefully prepared, reviewed
and checked this Sworn Work History Statement and that the statements contained in this Sworn
Work History Statement are true and correct.
IF NECESSARY FOR FULL DISCLOSURE, ADD SEPARATE SHEETS
JOINT VENTURES MUST SUBMIT SEPARATE
SWORN WORK HISTORY STATEMENTS FOR THE JOINT VENTURE
AND FOR EACH SIGNATORY TO THE JOINT VENTURE AGREEMENT
1. Nature of Business
State the nature of Bidder's business:
2. Composition of Work
During the past three years, Bidder's work has consisted of:
Federal
% Other Public
% Private
3. Years in Business
% As Contractor
% As Subcontractor
% Bidder's Forces
% Subcontractors
% Materials
State the number of years that Bidder, under its current name and organization, has been
continuously engaged in the aforesaid business: years
-I-
WORK HISTORY STATEMENT
4. Predecessor Organizations
If Bidder has been in business under its current name and organization for less than five years,
list any predecessor organizations:
NAME
ADDRESS
5. Business Licenses
List all business licenses currently held by Bidder:
ISSUING AGENCY TYPE
YEARS
NUMBER EXPIRATION
G. Related Experience
List three projects most comparable to the Work completed by Bidder, or its
predecessors, in the past five years:
Owner Name
Owner Address
Reference
Telephone Number
Type of Work
PROJECT ONE PROJECT TWO PROJECT THREE
-2-
WORK HISTORY STATEMENT
PROJECT ONE PROJECT TWO PROJECT THREE
Contractor
(If Bidder was)
(Subcontractor)
Amount of Contract
Date Completed
DATED: , 20
Bidder
By:
Title:
Attest
Title:
Subscribed and Sworn to before me on , 20
Notary Public
My commission expires: , 20
SEE GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, SECTION 7,
FOR SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS
-3-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
BID PACKAGE
NOTICE OF AWARD
TO: FROM: Village of Oak Brook
("Contractor") ("Owner")
On , 20_____, Owner found to be most favorable to the interests of
Owner the Bidder's Proposal submitted by Contractor and dated , 20, in
which Contractor proposes to contract with Owner, in the form of the Contract included in the
Bid Package to perform the following Work: (1) to provide, perform and complete at the Work
Site and in the manner described and specified in the Bid Package all necessary work, labor,
services, transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric,
water, waste disposal, information, data and other means and items necessary for ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS UPGRADE as shown on the drawings and described herein. The general contractor
shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise; (2) to procure and furnish all
permits, licenses and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in connection
therewith except as otherwise expressly provided in Attachment A to the Contract included in the
Bid Package; (3) to procure and furnish all Bonds and all certificates and policies of insurance
specified in the Bid Package; (4) to pay all applicable federal, state and local taxes; (5) to do all
other things required of the Contractor by the Contract; and (6) to provide, perform and complete
all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner and in full compliance with, and as
required by or pursuant to, the Contract.
OWNER ACCORDINGLY AWARDS CONTRACTOR, EFFECTIVE AS OF THE DATE
OF DELIVERY OF THIS NOTICE OF AWARD, THE CONTRACT FOR SAID WORK
FOR THE LUMP SUM AND/OR UNIT PRICES, AS THE CASE MAY BE, SET FORTH
IN THE BIDDER'S PROPOSAL.
The Contract will be finalized and executed on , 20 , at the above listed
office of Owner. The Contract will be executed by Owner provided that all conditions precedent
to finalization have been satisfied. Contractor must have complied with all conditions precedent
to finalization set forth in Section 15 of the General Instructions to Bidders included in the Bid
Package, on or before this date.
The failure or refusal to comply with the conditions precedent to finalization on or before the
Finalization Date or to execute the Contract on the Finalization Date shall result, at Owner's
-1-
NOTICE OF AWARD
option, in the imposition of liquidated damages and the annulment of this award, or in Owner's
exercise of any or all equitable remedies Owner may have, all as more specifically set forth in
Sections 8, 15, and 16 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
DATED: , 20
Village of Oak Brook
By:
Name
Title
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
CONTRACT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
CONTRACT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1: THE VVORK......................................................................................................1
1.1
Performance of the Work...........................................................................................1
1.2
Commencement and Completion Dates.....................................................................
2
1.3
Required Submittals...................................................................................................2
A.
Submittals Required...................................................................................................
2
B.
Number and Format....................................................................................................
2
C.
Time of Submission and Owner's Re`pie«r.................................................................2
D.
Responsibility for Dela3T.............................................................................................2
1.4
Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions.....................................................
3
1.5
Conditions at the Work Site; Record Drawings......................................................... 3
1.6
Technical Ability to Perform......................................................................................4
1.7
Financial Ability to Perform.......................................................................................
4
1.8
Time............................................................................................................................ 4
1.9
Safety at the Work Site...............................................................................................4
1.10
Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs................................................................
5
1.11
Damage to the Work, the Work Site, and Other Property ..........................................
5
1.12
Subcontractors and Suppliers.....................................................................................
5
A.
Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers ...................................................
5
B.
Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers.................................................................
6
1.13
Simultaneous Work By Others...................................................................................6
1.14
Occupancy Prior to Final Payment.............................................................................
6
1.15
Owner's Right to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience
.............................. 6
A.
Termination. or Suspension for Convenience.............................................................6
B.
Payment for Completed Work....................................................................................6
ARTICLE It: CHANGES AND DELAYS.............................................................................
7
2.1
Changes......................................................................................................................
7
2z
2.2
Delays......................................................................................................................... 7
A.
Extensions for Unavoidable Delays...........................................................................
7
B.
No Compensation for Delays.....................................................................................
7
ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DEFECTIVE WORK.......
7
3.1
Inspection; Testing; Correction of Defects.................................................................
7
A.
Inspection.............................................................................. ..........
7
B.
Re-Inspection..............................................................................................................7
C.
Correction...................................................................................................................8
3.2
Warranty of Work.......................................................................................................
8
A.
Scope of Warranty......................................................................................................
8
B.
Repairs; Extension of Warranty.................................................................................
8
C.
Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties......................................................................
8
3.3
Owner's Right to Correct......................................................................--...........
8
ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES................................................................••......9
4.1
Bonds............. ••....... .................................................................................................... 9
4.2
Insurance..................................................................................................................... 9
4.3
Indemnification...........................................................................................................
9
ARTICLE 17: PAYMENT.......................................................................................................
9
5.1
Contract Price.............................................................................................................
9
5.2
Taxes and Benefits................................................••...................................................
9
5.3
Progress Payments....................................................................................................10
A.
Payment in Installments...........................................................................................10
B.
Pay Requests.............................................................................................................10
C.
Work Entire..............................................................................................................10
5.4
Final Acceptance and Final Payment.......................................................................10
A.
Notice of Completion...............................................................................................10
B.
Punch List and Final Acceptance.............................................................................10
C.
Final Payment...........................................................................................................10
5.5
Liens.........................................................................................................................11
A.
Title...........................................................................................................................11
B.
Waivers of Lien........................................................................................................11
C.
Removal of Liens.....................................................................................................11
D.
Protection of Owner Only........................................................................................11
5.6
Deductions................................................................................................................11
-11-
A.
Owner's Right to Withhold......................................................................................
11
B.
Use of vVithheld Funds.............................................................................................12
ARTICLE
VI: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES.....................................................................12
6.1
Dispute Resolution Procedure..................................................................................12
A.
Notice of Disputes and Objections............................................................................12
B.
Negotiation of Disputes and Objections...................................................................12
6.2
Contractor's Remedies.............................................................................................13
6.3
Owner's Remedies... ......... ............... ...... - ...............................................................
13
6.4
Owner's Additional Remedy for Delay....................................................................14
6.5
Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience.......................................14
ARTICLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS AND REQUIREMENTS ...........................14
7.1
Binding Effect..........................................................................................................14
7.2
Relationship of the Parties..... ...................................................................................
15
7.3
No Collusion/Prohibited Interests............................................................................15
7.4
Assignment...............................................................................................................15
7.5
Confidential Information..........................................................................................
15
7.6
No Waiver................................................................................................................16
7.7
No Third Party Beneficiaries....................................................................................16
7.8
Notices......................................................................................................................
16
7.9
Governing Laws.......................................................................................................17
7.10
Changes in Laws.......................................................................................................17
7.11
Compliance with Laws.............................................................................................17
A.
Compliance Required...............................................................................................17
B.
Liability for Fines, Penalties.....................................................................................
17
C.
Prevailing Wage Act .......................................
D.
Required Provisions Deemed Inserted.....................................................................
18
7.12
..........................
Compliance with Patents ............................................... .................18
A.
Assumption of Costs. Royalties, and Fees...............................................................18
B.
Effect of Contractor Being Enjoined........................................................................18
7.13
Time..........................................................................................................................18
7.14
Severability ............................................. ..19
7.15
Entire Agreement......................................................................................................19
7.16
Amendments.............................................................................................................19
Contractor's Certification
Attachment A: Supplemental Schedule of Contract Terms
Attachment B:
Specifications
Attachment C:
List of Drawings
Attachment D:
Special Project Requirements
Appendix 1:
Prevailing Wages
Appendix 2:
Form of Performance Bond
Appendix 3:
Form of Labor and Materials Bond
_IV-
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
CONTRACT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
In consideration of the mutual promises set forth below, the Village of Oak Brook, 1200
Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, 60523, an Illinois municipal corporation ("O"wer"),
and a
Corporation ("Contractor"), make this Contract as of 2016
(the "Effective Date") and hereby agree as follows:
ARTICLE L• THE WORK
1.1 Performance of the Work
Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, must provide, perform, and complete all of the
following, all of which is herein referred to as the "Tfork ":
1. Labor. Equipment, Materials and Supplies. Provide, perform, and complete, in
the manner described and specified in this Contract, all necessary work, labor;
services, transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels,
gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and other means and items
necessary to accomplish the Project at the Work Site, both as defined in
Attachment A, in accordance with the specifications attached hereto as
Attachment B, the drawings identified in the list attached hereto as Attachment C,
and the Special Project Requirements attached hereto as Attachment D.
2. Permits. Except as otherwise provided in Attachment A. procure and furnish all
permits, licenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary
in connection therewith.
Bonds and Insurance. Procure and furnish all Bonds and all certificates of
insurance specified in this Contract.
4. Taxes. Pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes.
Miscellaneous. Do all other things required of Contractor by this Contract,
including without limitation arranging for utility and other services needed for the
Work and for testing, including the installation of temporary utility lines, wiring,
switches, fixtures, hoses, connections, and meters, and providing sufficient
sanitar)7 conveniences and shelters to accommodate all workers and all personnel
of Owner engaged in the Work.
6. uality. Provide, perform.. and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and
workmanlike manner, consistent with the highest standards of professional and
CONTRACT
construction practices and in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant
to, this Contract, and with the greatest economy, efficiency, and expedition
consistent therewith, with only new, undamaged and first quality equipment,
materials, and supplies.
1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates
Contractor must commence the Work not later than the "Commencement Date" set forth
on Attachment A and must diligently and continuously prosecute the Work at such a rate as will
allow the Work to be fully provided, performed, and completed in full compliance with this
Contract not later than the "Completion Date" set forth in Attachinent A. The time of
commencement, rate of progress, and time of completion are referred to in this Contract as the
"Con11'act TIn?-e."
1.3 Required Submittals
A. Submittals Required. Contractor must submit to Owner all documents, data, and
information specifically required to be submitted by Contractor under this Contract and must, in
addition, submit to Owner all such drawings, specifications, descriptive information, and
engineering documents, data, and information as may be required, or as may be requested by
Owner, to show the details of the Work, including a complete description of all equipment,
materials, and supplies to be provided under this Contract (".Required Submittals"). Such details
must include, but are not limited to, design data, structural and operating features, principal
dimensions, space required or provided, clearances required or provided, type and brand of
finish, and all similar matters, for all components of the Work.
B. Number and Format. Contractor must provide three complete sets for each
Required Submittal. All Required Submittals must be prepared on white 8-1/2"x11" paper.
C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review. All Required Submittals must be
provided to Owner no later than the time, if any, specified in this Contract for their submission
or, if no time for submission is specified, in sufficient time. in Owner's sole opinion, to permit
Owner to review the same prior to the commencement of the part of the Work to which they
relate and prior to the purchase of any equipment, materials, or supplies that they describe.
Owner will have the right to require such corrections as may be necessary to make such
submittals conform to this Contract. All such submittals will, after final processing and review
with no exception noted by Owner, become a part of this Contract. No Work related to any
submittal may be performed by Contractor until Owner has completed review of such submittal
with no exception noted. Owner's review and stamping of any Required Submittal will be for
the sole purpose of examining the general management, design, and details of the proposed
Work, does not relieve Contractor of the entire responsibility for the performance of the Work in
full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to this Contract, and may not be regarded as
any assumption of risk or liability by Owner.
D. Responsibility for Delay. Contractor is responsible for any delay in the Work due
to delay in providing Required Submittals conforming to this Contract.
-2-
CONTRACT
1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions
Contractor represents and warrants that it has carefully reviewed this Contract, including
all of its Attachments, and the drawings identified in Attachment C, all of which are by this
reference incorporated into and made a part of this Contract. Contractor must, at no increase in
the Contract Price, provide workmanship, equipment, materials, and supplies that fully conform
to this Contract. Whenever an), equipment, materials or supplies are specified or described in
this Contract by using the name or other identifying feature of a proprietary product or the name
or other identifying feature of a particular manufacturer or vendor, the specific item mentioned is
understood as establishing the type, function and quality desired. Other manufacturers' or
vendors' products may be accepted, provided that the products proposed are equivalent in
substance and function to those named as determined by Owner in its sole and absolute
discretion.
Contractor must promptly notify Owner of any discrepancy, error, omission, ambiguity,
or conflict among any of the provisions of this Contract before proceeding with any Work
affected thereby. If Contractor fails to give such notice to Owner, then the subsequent decision
of Owner as to which provision of this Contract governs is final, and any corrective work
required does not entitle Contractor to any damages, to any compensation in excess of the
Contract Price, or to any delay or extension of the Contract Time.
When the equipment, materials, or supplies furnished by Contractor cannot be installed as
specified in this Contract, Contractor must, without any increase in the Contract Price, make all
modifications required to properly install the equipment, materials, or supplies. Any such
modification is subject to the prior review and consent of Owner.
1.5 Conditions at the Work Site, Record Drawings
Contractor represents and warrants that it has had a sufficient opportunity to conduct a
thorough investigation of the Work Site and the surrounding area and has completed such
investigation to its satisfaction. Contractor will have no claim for damages, for compensation in
excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay or extension of the Contract Time based upon
conditions found at, or in the vicinity of, the Work Site. urhen information pertaining to
subsurface, underground or other concealed conditions, soils analysis, borings, test pits, utility
locations or conditions, buried structures, condition of existing structures, and other
investigations is or has been provided by Owner, or is or has been otherwise made available to
Contractor by Owner; such information is or has been provided or made available solely for the
convenience of Contractor and is not part of this Contract. Owner assumes no responsibility
whatever in respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of such information, and there is no guaranty
or warranty, either expressed or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of those
existing throughout the Work or the Work Site, or that the conditions indicated are representative
of those existing at any particular location, or that the conditions indicated may not change, or
that unanticipated conditions may not be present.
CONTRACT
Contractor is solely responsible for locating all existing underground installations by
prospecting no later than two workdays prior to any scheduled excavation or trenching,
whichever is earlier. Contractor must check all dimensions, elevations, and quantities indicated
in this Contract within the same tirne period as set forth above for prospecting underground
installations. Contractor must lay out the Work in accordance with this Contract and must
establish and maintain such locations, lines and levels. Wherever pre-existing work is
encountered, Contractor must verify and be responsible for dimensions and location of such pre-
existing work. Contractor must notifS, Owner of any discrepancy between the dimensions,
elevations and quantities indicated in this Contract and the conditions of the Work Site or any
other errors, omissions or discrepancies which Contract may discover during such inspections.
Full instructions will be furnished by Owner should such error, omission, or discrepancy be
discovered, and Contractor must carry out such instructions as if originally specified and without
any increase in Contract Price.
Before Final Acceptance of the Work, Contractor must submit to Owner two sets of
Drawings of Record, unless a greater number is specified elsewhere in this Contract, indicating
all field deviations from Attachment B or the drawings identified in Attachment C.
1.6 Technical Abilih, to Perform
Contractor represents and warrants that it is sufficiently experienced and competent, and
has the necessary capital, facilities, plant, organization, and staff, to provide, perform and
complete the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract.
1.7 Financial Ability to Perform
Contractor represents and warrants that it is financially solvent, and Contractor has the
financial resources necessary to provide, perform and complete the Work in full compliance
with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract.
1.8 Time
Contractor represents and warrants that it is ready, willing, able and prepared to begin the
Work on the Commencement Date and that the Contract Time is sufficient time to permit
completion of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract
for the Contract Price, all with due regard to all natural and man-made conditions that may affect
the Work or the Work Site and all difficulties, hindrances, and delays that may be incident to the
V+Tork.
1.9 Safety at the W rk Site
Contractor is solely and completely responsible for providing and maintaining safe
conditions at the Work Site, including the safety of all persons and property during performance
of the Work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours.
Contractor must take all safety precautions as necessary to comply with all applicable laws and
to prevent injury to persons and damage to property.
-4-
CONTRACT
Contractor must conduct all of its operations without interruption or interference with
vehicular and pedestrian traffic on public and private rights-of-way, unless it has obtained
permits therefor from the proper authorities. If any public or private right-of-way are rendered
unsafe by Contractor's operations, Contractor must make such repairs or provide such temporary
ways or guards as are acceptable to the proper authorities.
1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs
Contractor must keep the Work Site and adjacent areas clean at all times during
performance of the Work and must, upon completion of the Work, leave the Work Site and
adjacent areas in a clean and orderly condition.
1.11 Damage to the Work, the Work Site, and Other Proper"'
The Work and everything pertaining thereto is provided, performed, completed, and
maintained at the sole risk and cost of Contractor from the Commencement Date until Final
Payment. Contractor is fully responsible for the protection of all public and private property and
all persons. Without limiting the foregoing, Contractor must, at its own cost and expense,
provide all permanent and temporary shoring, anchoring and bracing required by the nature of
the Work in order to make all parts absolutely stable and rigid, even when such shoring,
anchoring and bracing is not explicitly specified, and support and protect all buildings, bridges,
roadways, conduits, wires, water pipes, gas pipes, sewers, pavements, curbs, sidewalks, fixtures
and landscaping of all kinds and all other public or private property that may be encountered or
endangered in providing, performing and completing the Work. Contractor will have no claim
against Owner because of any damage or loss to the Work or to Contractor's equipment,
materials, or supplies from any cause whatsoever, including damage or loss due to simultaneous
work by others. Contractor must, promptly and without charge to Owner, repair or replace, to
the satisfaction of Owner, any damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work and any
damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work Site or other property as a result of the
Work. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, Contractor's obligations under this
Section exist without regard to, and may not be construed to be waived by, the availability or
unavailability of any insurance, either of Owner or Contractor, to indemnify, hold harmless, or
reimburse Contractor for the cost of any repair or replacement work required by this Section.
1.12 Subcontractors and Suppliers
A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers. Contractor must perform the
Work with its own personnel and under the management, supervision, and control of its own
organization unless otherwise approved by Owner in writing. All subcontractors, suppliers, and
subcontracts used by Contractor must be acceptable to, and approved in advance by, Owner.
Owner's approval of any subcontractor, supplier, and subcontract does not relieve Contractor of
full responsibility and liability for the provision, performance, and completion of the Work in
full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. All Work performed
under any subcontract is subject to all of the provisions of this Contract in the same manner as if
performed by employees of Contractor. Every reference in this Contract to "Contractor" is
-5-
CONTRACT
deemed also to refer to all subcontractors and suppliers of Contractor. Every subcontract must
include a provision binding the subcontractor or supplier to all provisions of this Contract.
B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers. If any subcontractor or supplier fails
to perform the part of the Work undertaken by it in a manner satisfactory to Owner, Contractor
must immediately upon notice from Owner terminate such subcontractor or supplier. Contractor
will have no claim for damages, for compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay
or extension of the Contract Time as a result of any such termination.
1.13 Simultaneous Work By Others
Owner has the right to perform or have performed such other work as Owner may desire
in, about, or near the Work Site during the performance of the Work by Contractor. Contractor
must make every reasonable effort to perform the Work in such manner as to enable both the
Work and such other work to be completed without hindrance or interference from each other.
Contractor must afford Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of
such other work and must properly coordinate the Work with such other work.
1.14 Occupancy Prior to Final Payment
Owner will have the right, at its election, to occupy, use, or place in service any part of
the Work prior to Final Payment. Such occupancy, use, or placement in service must be
conducted in such manner as not to damage any of the Work or to unreasonably interfere with
the progress of the Work. No such occupancy, use, or placement in service may be consti2ied as
an acceptance of any of the Work or a release or satisfaction of Contractor's duty to insure and
protect the 'Work, nor may it, unless conducted in an unreasonable manner, be considered as an
interference with Contractor's provision, performance, or completion of the Work.
1.15 Owner's Right to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience
A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience. Owner has the right, for its
convenience, to terminate or suspend the Work in whole or in part at any time by written notice
to Contractor. Every such notice must state the extent and effective date of such termination or
suspension. On such effective date, Contractor must, as and to the extent directed, stop Work
under this Contract, cease all placement of further orders or subcontracts, terminate or suspend
Work under existing orders and subcontracts, cancel any outstanding orders or subcontracts that
may be cancelled, and take any action necessary to protect any property in its possession in
which Owner has or may acquire any interest and to dispose of such property in such manner as
may be directed by Owner.
B. Payment for Completed Work. In the event of any termination pursuant to
Subsection 1.15A above, Owner must pay Contractor (1) such direct costs, excluding overhead,
as Contractor has paid or incun•ed for all Work done in compliance with, and as required by or
pursuant to, this Contract up to the effective date of termination together with ten percent of such
costs for overhead and profit. and (2) such other costs pertaining to the Work, exclusive of
overhead and profit, as Contractor may have reasonably and necessarily incurred as the result of
Iral
CONTRACT
such termination. Any such payment may be offset by any prior payment or payments and is
subject to Owner's rights to withhold and deduct as provided in this Contract.
ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS
2,1 Changes
Owner has the right, by written order executed by Owner, to make changes in the
Contract, the Work, the Work Site, and the Contract Time ("Change Order"), If any Change
Order causes an increase or decrease in the amount of the Work, an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Price or Contract Time may be made. All claims by Contractor for an equitable
adjustment in either the Contract Price or the Contract Time must be made within two business
days following receipt of such Change Order, and may, if not made prior to such time, be
conclusively deemed to have been waived. No decrease in the amount of the Work caused by
any Change Order will entitle Contractor to make any claim for damages, anticipated profits, or
other compensation.
2.2 Delays
A. Extensions for Unavoidable DelZLs. For any delay that may result from causes
that could not be avoided or controlled by Contractor, Contractor must, upon timely -written
application, be entitled to issuance of a Change Order providing for an extension of the Contract
Time for a period of time equal to the delay resulting from such unavoidable cause. No
extension of the Contract Time will be allowed for any other delay in completion of the Work.
B. No Compensation for Delays. No payment, compensation, damages, or
adjustment of any kind, other than the extension of the Contract Time provided in Subsection
2.2A above, may be made to, or claimed by, Contractor because of hindrances or delays from
any cause in the commencement, prosecution, or completion of the Work, whether caused by
Owner or any other party and whether avoidable or unavoidable.
ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR
DEFECTIVE WORK
3.1 Inspection; Testing Correction of Defects
A. Inspection. Until Final Payment, all parts of the Work are subject to inspection
and testing by Owner or its designated representatives. Contractor must furnish, at its own
expense, all reasonable access, assistance, and facilities required by Owner for such inspection
and testing.
B. Re -Inspection. Re -inspection and re -testing of any Work may be ordered by
Owner at any time, and, if so ordered, any covered or closed Work must be uncovered or opened
by Contractor. If the Work is found to be in full compliance with this Contract, then Owner- must
pay the cost of uncovering, opening; re -inspecting, or re -testing, as the case may be. If such
Work is not in full compliance with this Contract, then Contractor must pay such cost.
-7-
CONTRACT
C. Correction. Until Final Payment, Contractor must, promptly and without charge,
repair, correct, or replace all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, or
unsuitable or that in any way fails to conform strictly to the requirements of this Contract.
3.2 Warrantv of Work
A. Scope of Warranty. Contractor warrants that the Work and all of its components
will be free from defects and flaws in design, workmanship, and materials; must strictly conform
to the requirements of this Contract; and will be ft, sufficient, and suitable for the purposes
expressed in, or reasonably inferred from, this Contract. The warranty herein expressed is in
addition to any other warranties expressed in this Contract.. or expressed or implied by law,
which are hereby reserved unto Owner.
B. Repairs, Extension of Warrant3 , Contractor, promptly and without charge, must
correct any failure to fulfill the above warranty that may be discovered or develop at any time
within one year after Final Payment or such longer period as may be prescribed in Attachment B
or Attachment D to this Contract or by law. The above warranty may be extended automatically
to cover all repaired and replacement parts and labor provided or performed under such warranty
and Contractor's obligation to correct Work may be extended for a period of one year from the
date of such repair or replacement. The time period established in this Subsection 3.2B relates
only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct Work and may not be construed to
establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations that. Contractor has under this
Contract.
C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties. Whenever Attachment B or Attachment
D requires a subcontractor or supplier to provide a guaranty or warranty, Contractor is solely
responsible for obtaining said guaranty or warranty in form satisfactory to Owner and assigning
said warranty or guaranty to Owner. Acceptance of any assigned warranties or guaranties by
Owner is a precondition to Final Payment and does not relieve Contractor of any of its guaranty
or warranty obligations under this Contract.
3.3 Owner's Right to Correct
If, within two business days after Owner gives Contractor notice of any defect, damage,
flaw, unsuitability, nonconformity, or failure to meet warrant}T subject to correction by
Contractor pursuant to Section 3.1 or Section 3.2 of this Contract, Contractor neglects to make,
or undertake with due diligence to make, the necessary corrections, then Owner is entitled to
make, either with its own forces or with contract forces, the corrections and to recover fi•om
Contractor all resulting costs, expenses, losses, or damages, including attorneys' fees and
administrative expenses.
-8-
ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES
4.1 Bonds
CONTRACT
Contemporaneous with Contractor's execution of this Contract, Contractor must provide
a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond, on forms provided by, or
otherwise acceptable to, Owner, from a surety company licensed to do business in the State of
Illinois with a general rating of A and a financial size category of Class X or better in Best's
Insurance Guide, each in the penal sum of the Contract Price (`Bonds"). Contractor, at all tunes
while providing, performing, or completing the Work, including, without limitation, at all times
while correcting any failure to meet warranty pursuant to Section 3.2 of this Contract, must
maintain and keep in force, at Contractor's expense, the Bonds required hereunder.
4.2 Insurance
Contractor hereby agrees and will, at its expense, carry insurance pursuant to the terms,
conditions, and coverages set forth in Attachment A.
4.3 Indemnification
Contractor hereby agrees to and will indemnify, and save harmless Owner and all of it
elected officials, officers, employees, attorneys, agents, and representatives against any and all
lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees
and administrative expenses, that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection
with Contractor's performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any pari thereof, whether or
not due or claimed to be due in whole or in part to the active, passive, or concurrent negligence
or fault of Contractor, except to the extent caused solely by the negligence of Owner.
ARTICLE V: PAYMENT
5.1 Contract Price
Owner must pay to Contractor, in accordance with and subject to the terms and
conditions set forth in this Article V and Attachment A, and Contractor must accept in full
satisfaction for providing, performing, and completing the Work, the amount or amounts set
forth in Attachment A (the "Contract Price"), subject to any additions, deductions, or
withholdings provided for in this Contract.
5.2 Taxes and Benefits
Owner is exempt from and will not be responsible to pay, or reimburse Contractor for,
any state or local sales, use, or excise taxes. The Contract Price includes all other applicable
federal, state, and local taxes of every kind and nature applicable to the Work as well as all taxes,
contributions, and premiums for unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits
pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits. All claim or right to claim additional compensation
-9-
CONTRACT
by reason of the payment of any such tax, contribution, or premium is hereby waived and
released by Contractor.
5.3 Progress Payments
A. Payment in Installments. The Contract Price must be paid in monthly
installments in the manner set forth in Attachment A ("Progress Payinents").
B. Pay Requests. The Village of Oak Brook authorizes the payment of invoices on
the second and fourth Tuesday of the month. For consideration on one of these dates, payment
request must be received no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the second or fourth Tuesday of
the month. Each Pay Request must include (a) Contractor's certification of the value of, and
partial or final waivers of lien covering, all Work for which payment is then requested and
(b) Contractor's certification that all prior Progress Payments have been properly applied to the
payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid.
C. Work Entire. This Contract and the Work are entire and the Work as a whole is
of the essence of this Contract. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, each and
every part of this Contract and of the Work are interdependent and common to one another and
to Owner's obligation to pay all or any part of the Contract Price or any other consideration for
the Work. Any and all Progress Payments made pursuant to this Article are provided merely for
the convenience of Contractor and for no other purpose.
5.4 Final Acceptance and Final Payment
A. Notice of Completion. When the Work has been completed and is ready in all
respects for acceptance by Owner, Contractor must notify Owner and request a final inspection
("Notice of Completion"). Contractor's Notice of Completion must be given sufficiently in
advance of the Completion Date to allow for scheduling of the final inspection and for
completion or correction before the Completion Date of any items identified by such inspection
as being defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or otherwise not in
full compliance with, or as required by or pursuant to, this Contract ("Punch List Work").
B. Punch List and Final Acceptance. The Work may be finally accepted when, and
only when, the whole and all parts thereof have been completed to the satisfaction of Owner in
full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. Upon receipt of
Contractor's Notice of Completion, Owner must make a review of the Work and notify
Contractor in writing of all Punch List Work, if any, to be completed or corrected. Following
Contractor's completion or correction of all Punch List Work, Owner must make another review
of the Work and prepare and deliver to Contractor either a written notice of additional Punch List
Work to be completed or corrected or a written notice of final acceptance of the Work ("Final
Acceptance"),
C. Final Payment. As soon as practicable after Final Acceptance, Contractor must
submit to Owner a properly completed final Pay Request in the form provided by Owner ("Final
Pay Request"). Owner must pay to Contractor the balance of the Contract Price, after deducting
-10-
CONTRACT
therefrom all charges against Contractor as provided for in this Contract ("Final Payment").
Final Payment must be made not later than 60 days after Owner approves the Final Pay Request.
The acceptance by Contractor of Final Payment will operate as a full and complete release of
Owner of and from any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and
expenses of, by, or to Contractor for anything done, furnished for, arising out of, relating to, or in
connection with the Work or for or on account of any act or neglect of Owner arising out of,
relating to, or in connection with the Work.
5.5 Liens
A. Title. Nothing in this Contract may be construed as vesting in Contractor any
right of property in any equipment, materials, supplies, and other items provided under this
Contract after they have been installed in, incorporated into, attached to, or affixed to, the Work
or the Work Site. All such equipment, materials, supplies, and other items will, upon being so
installed, incorporated, attached or affixed, become the property of Owner, but such title will not
release Contractor from its duty to insure and protect the Work in accordance with the
requirements of this Contract.
B. Waivers of Lien. Contractor must, from time to time at OvcTner's request and in
any event prior to Final Payment, furnish to Owner such receipts, releases, affidavits, certificates,
and other evidence as may be necessary to establish, to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner, that
no lien against the Work or the public funds held by Owner exists in favor of any person
whatsoever for or by reason of any equipment, material, supplies, or other item furnished, labor
performed, or other thing done in connection with the Work or this Contract ("Lien") and that no
right to file any Lien exists in favor of any person whatsoever.
C. Removal of Liens. If at any time any notice of any Lien is filed, then Contractor
must, promptly and without charge, discharge, remove, or otherwise dispose of such Lien. Until
such discharge, removal, or disposition, Owner will have the right to retain from any money
payable hereunder an amount that Owner, in its sole judgment, deems necessary to satisfy such
Lien and to pay the costs and expenses, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, of
an), actions brought in comlection therewith or by reason thereof.
D. Protection of Owner Only. This Section does not operate to relieve Contractor's
surety or sureties from any of their obligations under the Bonds, nor may it be deemed to vest
any right, interest, or entitlement in any subcontractor or supplier. Owner's retention of funds
pursuant to this Section is deemed solely for the protection of its own interests pending removal
of such Liens by Contractor, and Owner will have no obligation to apply such funds to such
removal but may, nevertheless, do so where OvxmeCs interests would thereby be served.
5.6 Deductions
A. Owner's Right to Withhold. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract
and without prejudice to any of 0V1mer's other rights or remedies, Owner will have the right at
any time or times, whether before or after approval of any Pay Request, to deduct and withhold
from any Progress or Final Payment that may be or become due under this Contract such amount
CONTRACT
as may reasonably appear necessary to compensate Owner for any actual or prospective loss due
to: (1) Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete;
(2) damage for which Contractor is liable under this Contract; (3) state or local sales, use, or
excise taxes from which Owner is exempt; (4) Liens or claims of Lien regardless of merit;
(5) claims of subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons regardless of merit; (6) delay in the
progress or completion of the Work; (7) inability of Contractor to complete the Work; (8) failure
of Contractor to properly complete or document any Pay Request; (9) any other failure of
Contractor to perform any of its obligations under this Contract; or (10) the cost to Owner,
including attorneys' fees and administrative costs, of correcting any of the aforesaid natters or
exercising any one or more of Owner's remedies set forth in Section 6.3 of this Contract.
B. Use of Withheld Funds. Owner is entitled to retain any and all amounts withheld
pursuant to Subsection 5.6A above until Contractor has either performed the obligations in
question or furnished security for such performance satisfactory to Owner. Owner is entitled to
apply any money withheld or any other money due Contractor under this Contract to reimburse
itself for any and all costs, expenses, losses, damages, liabilities, suits, judgments, awards,
attorneys' fees and administrative expenses incurred, suffered, or sustained by Owner and
chargeable to Contractor under this Contract.
ARTICLE VI: DISPUTES AND REMEDIES
6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure
A. Notice of Dilutes_ and Objections. If Contractor disputes or objects to any
requirement, direction, instruction, interpretation, determination, or decision of Owner,
Contractor may notify Owner in writing of its dispute or objection and of the amount of any
equitable adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time to which Contractor claims it will be
entitled as a result thereof; provided, however, that Contractor must, nevertheless, proceed
without delay to perform the Work as required, directed, instructed, interpreted, determined, or
decided by Owner, without regard to such dispute or objection. Unless Contractor so notifies
Owner within two business days after receipt of such requirement, direction, instruction,
interpretation; determination, or decision, Contractor is conclusively deemed to have waived all
such disputes or objections and all claims based thereon.
B. Negotiation of Disputes and Objections. To avoid and settle without litigation
an), such dispute or objection, Owner and Contractor agree to engage in good faith negotiations.
Within three business days after Owner's receipt of Contractor's written notice of dispute or
objection, a conference between Owner and Contractor will be held to resolve the dispute.
Within three business days after the end of the conference, Owner must render its final decision,
in writing, to Contractor. If Contractor objects to the final decision of Owner, then it must,
within three business days, give Owner notice thereof and, in such notice, must state its final
demand for settlement of the dispute. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner, Contractor will be
conclusively deemed (1) to have agreed to and accepted Owner's final decision and (2) to have
waived all claims based on such final decision.
-12-
CONTRACT
6.2 Contractor's Remedies
If Owner fails or refuses to satisfy a final demand made by Contractor pursuant to
Section 6.1 of this Contract, or to otherwise resolve the dispute which is the subject of such
demand to the satisfaction of Contractor, within 10 days after receipt of such demand, then
Contractor will be entitled to pursue such remedies, not inconsistent with the provisions of this
Contract, as it may have in law or equity.
6.3 Owner's Remedies
If it should appear at any time prior to Final Payment that Contractor has failed or refused
to prosecute, or has delayed in the prosecution of the Work with diligence at a rate that assures
completion of the Work in full compliance with the requirements of this Contract on or before
the Completion Date, or has attempted to assign this Contract or Contractor's rights under this
Contract, either in whole or in part, or has falsely made any representation or warranty in this
Contract, or has otherwise failed, refused, or delayed to perform or satisfy any other requirement
of this Contract or has failed to pay its debts as they come due ("Event of Default"), and has
failed to cure any such Event of Default within five business days after Contractor's receipt of
written notice of such Event of Default, then Owner will have the right, at its election and
without prejudice to any other remedies provided by lain or equity, to pursue any one or more of
the following remedies:
1. Owner may require Contractor, within such reasonable time as may be fixed by
Owner, to complete or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective,
damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; to remove fiom the
Work Site any such Work; to accelerate all or any part of the Work; and to take
any or all other action necessary to bring Contractor and the Work into strict
compliance with this Contract.
2. Owner may perform or have performed all IvVork necessary for the
accomplishment of the results stated in Paragraph 1 above and withhold or
recover from Contractor all the cost and expense, including attorneys' fees and
administrative costs, incurred by Owner in connection therewith.
3. Owner may accept the defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming,
incomplete, or dilatory Work or part thereof and make an equitable reduction in
the Contract Price.
4. Owner may terminate this Contract without liability for further payment of
amounts due or to become due under this Contract.
5. Owner may, without terminating this Contract, terminate Contractor's rights
under this Contract and, for the purpose of completing or correcting the Work,
evict Contractor and take possession of all equipment, materials, supplies, tools,
appliances, plans, specifications, schedules, manuals, drawings, and other papers
relating to the Work, whether at the Work Site or elsewhere, and either complete
-13-
CONTRACT
or correct the Work with its own forces or contracted forces, all at Contractor's
expense.
6. Upon any termination of this Contract or of Contractor's rights under this
Contract, and at Owner's option exercised in writing, any or all subcontracts and
supplier contracts of Contractor will be deemed to be assigned to Owner without
any further action being required, but Owner may not thereby assume any
obligation for payments due under such subcontracts and supplier contracts for
any Work provided or performed prior to such assignment.
7. Owner may withbold from any Progress Payment or Final Payment, whether or
not previously approved, or may recover from Contractor, any and all costs,
including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses, incurred by Owner as the
result of any Event of Default or as a result of actions taken by Owner in response
to any Event of Default.
8. Owner may recover any damages suffered by Owner.
6.4 Owner's Additional Remedy for Delay
If the Work is not completed by Contractor, in full compliance with, and as required by
or pursuant to, this Contract, within the Contract Time as such time may be extended by Change
Order, then Owner may invoke its remedies under Section 6.3 of this Contract or may, in the
exercise of its sole and absolute discretion, permit Contractor to complete the Work but charge to
Contractor, and deduct from any Progress or Final Payments, whether or not previously
approved, administrative expenses and costs for each day completion of the Work is delayed
beyond the Completion Date, computed on the basis of the "Per Diem AdininistralNe Charge"
set forth in Attachment A, as well as any additional damages caused by such delay.
6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience
Any termination or suspension of Contractor's rights under this Contract for an alleged
default that is ultimately held unjustified will automatically be deemed to be a termination or
suspension for the convenience of Owner under Section 1.15 of this Contract.
ARTICLE VII: LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS
AND REQUIREMENTS
7.1 Binding Effect
This Contract is binding on Owner and Contractor and on their respective heirs,
executors, administrators, personal representatives, and permitted successors and assigns. Every
reference in this Contract to a party is deemed to be a reference to the authorized officers,
employees, agents; and representatives of such party.
-14-
CONTRACT
7.2 Relationship of the Parties
Contractor will act as an independent contractor in providing and performing the Work.
Nothing in, nor done pursuant to, this Contract may be construed (1) to create the relationship of
principal and agent, partners, or joint venturers between Owner and Contractor or (2) except as
provided in Paragraph 6.3(6) above, to create any relationship between Owner and any
subcontractor or supplier of Contractor.
7.3 No Collusion/Prohibited Interests
Contractor hereby represents that the only persons, firms, or corporations interested in
this Contract as principals are those disclosed to Owner prior to the execution of this Contract,
and that this Contract is made without collusion with any other person, firm, or corporation. If at
any time it is found that Contractor has, in procuring this Contract, colluded with any other
person, firm., or corporation, then Contractor will be liable to Owner for all, loss or damage that
Owner may suffer thereby, and this Contract will, at Owner`s option, be null and void.
Contractor hereby represents and warrants that neither Contractor nor any person
affiliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or will have
an interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is acting,
directly or indirectly, for or on behalf of any person, group, entity or nation named by the United-
States
nitedStates Treasury Department as a Specially Designated National and Blocked Person, or for or on
behalf of any person, group, entity or nation designated in Presidential Executive Order 13224 as
a person who commits, threatens to commit, or supports terrorism, and neither Contractor nor
any person affiliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or
will have an interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is,
directly or indirectly, engaged in, or facilitating, the Work on behalf of any such person, group,
entity or nation.
7.4 Assignment
Contractor may not (1) assign this Contract in whole or in part, (2) assign any of
Contractor's rights or obligations under this Contract, or (3) assign any payment due or to
become due under this Contract without the prior express written approval of Owner, which
approval may be withheld in the sole and unfettered discretion of Owner; provided, however,
that Owner's prior written approval will not be required for assignments of accounts.. as defined
in the Illinois Commercial Code, if to do so would violate Section 9-318 of the Illinois
Commercial Code, S 10 1LCS 5/9-318. O -,Amer may assign this Contract, in whole or in part, or
any or all of its rights or obligations under this Contract, without the consent of Contractor.
7.5 Confidential Information
All information supplied by Owner to Contractor for or in connection with this Contract
or the Work must be held confidential by Contractor and may not, without the prior express
written consent of Owner, be used for any purpose other than performance of the Work.
-15-
CONTRACT
7.6 No Waiver
No examination, inspection, investigation, test, measurement, review, determination,
decision, certificate, or approval by Owner, nor any order by Owner for the payment of money,
nor any payment for, or use, occupancy, possession, or acceptance of, the whole or any part of
the Work by Owner, nor any extension of time granted by Owner, nor any delay by Owner in
exercising any right under this Contract, nor any other act or omission of Owner may constitute
or be deemed to be an acceptance of any defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming
or incomplete Work, equipment, materials, or supplies, nor operate to waive or otherwise
diminish the effect of any warranty or representation made by Contractor; or of any requirement
or provision of this Contract; or of any remedy, power, or right of Owner.
7.7 No Third Parh, Beneficiaries
No claim as a third party beneficiary under this Contract by any person, firm, or
corporation other than Contractor may be made or be valid against Owner.
7.8 Notices
All notices required or permitted to be given under this Contract must be in writing and
are deemed received by the addressee thereof when delivered in person on a business day at the
address set forth below or on the third business day after being deposited in any main or branch
United States post office, for delivery at the address set forth below by properly addressed,
postage prepaid, certified or registered mail, return receipt requested.
Notices and communications to Owner must be addressed to, and delivered at, the
following address:
Village of Oak Brook
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook, Illinois 60523
Attention: Doug Patebin, Public Works Director
Notices and communications to Contractor must be addressed to, and delivered at, the
following address:
The foregoing may not be deemed to preclude the use of other non -oral means of
notification or to invalidate any notice properly given by any such other non -oral means.
M
CONTRACT
By notice complying with the requirements of this Section, Owner and Contractor each
have the right to change the address or addressee or both for all future notices to it, but no notice
of a change of address is effective until actually received.
7.9 Governing Laws
This Contract and the rights of Owner and Contractor under this Contract will be
interpreted according to the internal laws, but not the conflict of laws rules, of the State of
Illinois; venue for any action related to this Contract will be in the Circuit Court of DuPage
County, Illinois.
7.10 Changes in Laws
Unless otherwise explicitly provided in this Contract, any reference to laws includes such
laws as they may be amended or modified from time to time.
7.11 Compliance with Laves
A. Compliance Required. Contractor must give all notices, pay all fees, and take all
other action that may be necessary to ensure that the Work is provided, performed, and
completed in accordance with all required governmental permits, licenses or other approvals and
authorizations that may be required in connection with providing, performing, and completing
the Work, and with all applicable statutes, ordinances, rules, and regulations, including without
limitation the Illinois Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (see Subsection C of this
Section) (a copy of the prevailing rate of wages ascertained by the Illinois Department of Labor,
in effect as of the date of this Contract, has been attached as an Appendix to this Contract; if the
Illinois Department of Labor revises the prevailing rate of hourly wages to be paid, the revised
rate applies to this Contract); any other applicable prevailing wage laws; the Fair Labor
Standards Act; any statutes regarding qualification to do business; any statutes requiring
preference to laborers of specified classes; the Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act, 30 ILCS
56511 et seq.; any statutes prohibiting discrimination because of or requiring affirmative action
based on, race, creed, color, national origin, age, sex, or other prohibited classification,
including, without limitation, the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. §§ 12101
et seq., the Illinois Human Rights Act, 775 ILCS 511-101 et seq., and the Public Works
Discrimination Act, 775 ILCS 1010.01 et seq.; and any statutes regarding safety or the
performance of the Work, including the Illinois Underground Utility Facilities Damage
Prevention Act, 220 ILCS 50/1 et seq., and the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, 29
U.S.C. §§ 651 et seq.
B. Liability for Fines. Penalties. Contractor is solely liable for any fines or civil
penalties that are imposed by any governmental or quasi -governmental agency or body that may
arise, or be alleged to have arisen. out of or in connection with. Contractor's, or its
subcontractors' or suppliers', performance o£ or failure to perform, the Work or an), part thereof.
C. Prevailing Wage Act. Contractor and each subcontractor, in order to comply with
the Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 13010.01 et seq. (the "Act'), must submit to the Village a
-17-
CONTRACT
certified payroll on a monthly basis, in accordance with Section 5 of the Act. The certified
payroll must consist of a complete copy of those records required to be made and kept by the
Act. The certified payroll must be accompanied by a statement signed by the contractor or
subcontractor that certifies that (1) such records are true and accurate, (2) the hourly rate paid is
not less than the general prevailing rate of hourly wages required by the Act, and (3) the
contractor or subcontractor is aware that filing a certified payroll that he or she knows to be false
is a Class B misdemeanor. Contractor may rely on the certification of a subcontractor, provided
that Contractor does not knowingly rely on a subcontractor's false certification. On two business
days' notice, Contractor and each subcontractor must make available for inspection the records
required to be made and kept by the Act (i) to the Village and its officers and agents and to the
Director of the Illinois Department of Labor and his or her deputies and agents and (ii) at all
reasonable hours at a location within the State.
D. Required Provisions Deemed Inserted. Every provision of law required by law to
be inserted into this Contract is deemed to be inserted herein.
7.12 Compliance with Patents
A. Assumption of Costs. Royalties, and Fees. Contractor will pay or cause to be paid
all costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the 'Work, of
patented equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions.
B. Effect of Contractor Being Enjoined. Should Contractor be enjoined from
furnishing or using any equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or
inventions supplied or required to be supplied or used under this Contract, Contractor must
promptly offer substitute equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or
inventions in lieu thereof, of equal efficiency, quality, suitability, and market value, for review
by Owner. If Owner should disapprove the offered substitutes and should elect, in lieu of a
substitution, to have supplied, and to retain and use, any such equipment, materials, supplies,
tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions as may by this Contract be required to be
supplied, Contractor must pay such royalties and secure such valid licenses as may be requisite
and necessary for Owner to use such equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices,
processes, or inventions without being disturbed or in any way interfered with by any proceeding
in law or equity on account thereof. Should Contractor neglect or refuse to make any approved
substitution promptly, or to pay such royalties and secure such licenses as may be necessary,
then Owner will have the right to make such substitution, or Owner may pay such royalties and
secure such licenses and charge the cost thereof against any money due Contractor from Owner
or recover the amount thereof from Contractor and its surety or sureties notwithstanding that
Final Payment may have been made.
7.13 Time
The Contract Time is of the essence of this Contract. Except where otherwise stated,
references in this Contract to days is construed to refer to calendar days.
-19-
CONTRACT
7.14 Severability
The provisions of this Contract will be interpreted when possible to sustain their legality
and enforceability as a whole. In the event any provision of this Contract is held invalid, illegal,
or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, in whole or in part, neither the validity of
the remaining part of such provision, nor the validity of any other provisions of this Contract will
be in any way affected thereby.
7.15 Entire A14reement
This Contract sets forth the entire agreement of Owner and Contractor with respect to the
accomplishment of the Work and the payment of the Contract Price therefor, and there are no
other understandings or agreements, oral or written, between Owner and Contractor with respect
to the Work and the compensation therefor.
7.16 Amendments
No modification, addition, deletion, revision, alteration or other change to this Contract is
effective unless and until such change is reduced to writing and executed and delivered by
Owner and Contractor.
[SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS]
CONTRACT
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have caused this Contract to be
executed by their properly authorized representatives in two original counterparts as of the
Effective Date.
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
By:
Name:
Title:
Attest:
By:
Name:
Title:
C�Ia" '7 IN 11117
By:
Name:
Title:
Attest:
By:
Name:
Title:
-20-
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
STATE OF ILLINOIS }
} SS
COUNTY OF )
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
contractor's executing officer], being first duly
sworn on oath, deposes and states that all statements herein made are made on behalf of
Contractor, that this deponent is authorized to make them, and that the statements contained
herein are true and correct.
Contractor deposes, states, and certifies that Contractor is not barred from contracting
with a unit of state or local govermnent as a result of (i) a violation of either Section 33E-3 or
Section 33E-4 of Article 33E of the Criminal Code of 1961, 720 ILCS 5133E-1 et seq.; or (ii)
a violation of the USA Patriot Act of 2001, 107 Public Law 56 (October 26, 2001) (the
"Patriot Act") or other statutes, orders, rules, and regulations of the United States government
and its various executive departments, agencies and offices related to the subject matter of the
Patriot Act, including, but not limited to, Executive Order 13224 effective September 24,
2001.
DATED: , 20
CONTRACTOR
By:
Name:
Title:
Attest:
By:
Name:
Title:
Subscribed and Sworn to before me on -20—
My
20
My Commission expires:
Notary Public
(SEAL)
�TR�JJililvi��� � '.i_ .i '► �T�J'�7
3L���1;�►y�►�.1�7:_ IBJ
1710- M- - f_ ofMMA
SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT TERMS
[Check applicable boxes and insert required information.]
L. Proiect:
Provide and install all materials needed for the Electrical Systems Upgrade as shown
on the drawings and described herein. The general contractor shall provide and install.
all materials, unless noted otherwise.
2. Work Site:
1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523.
3. Permits, Licenses, Approvals, and Authorizations:
Contractor must obtain all required governmental permits, licenses, approvals, and
authorizations.
4. Commencement Date:
Commencement Date shall be mutually agreed upon by Owner and Contractor.
Owner anticipates work to begin in January 2017.
5. Completion Date:
Completion Date shall be mutually agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. The
Completion Date will be subject to equitable adjustment if the Commencement Date is
delayed pursuant to Subsection 2.2A of the Contract.
6. Insurance Coverage:
Certificates of Insurance shall be presented to Owner within fifteen (15) days after the
receipt by the Contractor of the Notice of Award and the unexecuted contract, it being
understood and agreed that the Owner will not approve and execute the Contract until
acceptable insurance certificates are received and approved by Owner.
Each contractor peiforming any work pursuant to a contract with Owner and each
permittee working under a permit as required pursuant to the provisions of Title 1 of
-1-
ATTACHMENT A
Chapter 8 of the Code of Ordinances of the Village of Oak Brook (hereinafter referred to
as "Insured") shall be required to carry such insurance as specified herein. Such contractor
and permittee shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract or permit
insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise
from or in connection with the performance of the work under the contract or permit,
either by the contractor, permittee, or their agents, representatives, employees or
subcontractors.
A contractor or permittee shall maintain insurance with limits no less than:
A. General Liability - $2,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence for bodily
injury, personal injury and property damage, provided that when the estimated cost
of the work in question does not exceed $25,000, the required limit shall be
$1,000,000;
B. Automobile Liability (if applicable) - $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident
for bodily injury and property damage;
C. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability - Worker's Compensation limits
as required by the Labor Code of the State of Illinois and Employer's Liability limits
of $1,000,000 per accident.
Any deductibles or self-insured retention must be declared to and approved by Owner. At.
the option of Owner, either the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductible or self-
insured retention as respect to Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers; or
the Insured shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations,
claim administration and defense expenses to the extent of such deductible or self-insured
retention.
The policies shall contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions:
D. General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverage -
(1) The Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered
as additional insureds as respects: liability arising out of activities
performed by or on behalf of the Insured; premises owned, occupied or used
by the Insured. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope
of protection afforded to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees,
volunteers, or agents.
(2) The Insured's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect to the
Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents. Any
insurance or self-insurance maintained by the Owner, its officers, officials,
employees, volunteers or agents shall be in excess of the Insured's insurance
and shall not contribute with it.
-2-
ATTACHMENT A
(3) Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not
affect coverage provided to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees,
volunteers or agents.
(4) The Insured's insurance shall apply separately to each covered party against
whom claim is made or suit is brought except with respect to the limits of the
insurer's liability.
E. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverage
The policy shall waive all rights of subrogation against the Owner, its
officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents for losses arising from
work performed by the insured for the Owner.
Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be suspended,
voided, canceled by either party, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30)
days prior written notice by certified mail has been given to Owner. Each insurance
policy shall name the Owner, its officers, officials and employees, volunteers and agents
as Additional Insureds. Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a Best's rating of no
less than A: VII.
Each Insured shall furnish the Owner with certificates of insurance and with original
endorsements effecting coverage required by this provision. The certificate and
endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that
insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be on
forms approved by the Owner and shall be subject to approval by the Village Attorney
before work commences. The Owner reserves the right to require complete, certified
copies of all required insurance policies, at any time.
Each insured shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish
separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for
subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein.
® D. Builders Risk Insurance. This insurance must be written in completed value
form, must protect Contractor and Owner against "all risks" of direct physical
loss to buildings, structures, equipment, and materials to be used in providing,
performing, and completing the Work, including without limitation fire
extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief, sprinkler leakage,
flood, earth movement and collapse, and must be designed for the
circumstances that may affect the Work.
This insurance must be written with limits not less than the insurable value of
the Work at completion. The insurable value must include the aggregate value
of Owner -furnished equipment and materials to be constructed or installed by
Contractor.
-3-
ATTACHMENT A
This insurance must include coverage while equipment or materials are in
warehouses, during installation, during testing, and after the Work is
completed, but prior to Final Payment. This insurance must include coverage
while Owner is occupying all or any part of the Work prior to Final Payment
without the need for the insurance company's consent.
❑ E. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. Contractor, at its
sole cost and expense, must purchase this Insurance in the name of Owner with
a combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not less than
$1,000,000.
F. Umbrella Policy. The required coverage may be in the form of an umbrella
policy above $2,000,000 primary coverage. All umbrella policies must
provide excess coverage over underlying insurance on a following -form basis
so that, when any loss covered by the primary policy exceeds the limits under
the primary policy, the excess or umbrella policy becomes effective to cover
that loss.
❑ G. Deductible. Each policy must have a deductible or sell -insured retention of not
more than $
H. Owner as Additional Insured. Owner must be named as an Additional Insured
on the following policies:
General Liability
The Additional Insured endorsement must identify Owner as follows:
The Village of Oak Brook and its boards, commissions, committees;
authorities, employees. agencies; officers, voluntary associations, and other
units operating under the jurisdiction and within the appointment of its budget.
I. Other Parties as Additional Insureds. In addition to Owner, the following
parties must be named as additional insured on the following policies:
Additional Insured Policy or Policies
Kluber Architects & Engineers
-4-
ATTACHMENT A
7. Contract Price:
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT
1. For providing, performing, and completing all Work, the total Contract Price of
(write in numbers):
In words.-
8.
ords.
8. Progress Payments:
A. General. Owner must pay to Contractor 90 percent of the Value of Work,
determined in the manner set forth below, installed and complete in place up to
the day before the Pay Request, less the aggregate of all previous Progress
Payments. The total amount of Progress Payments made prior to Final
Acceptance by Owner may not exceed 90 percent of the Contract Price.
B. Value of Work. The Value of the Work will be determined as follows:
(1) Lump Sum_ Items. For all Work to be paid on a lump sum basis,
Contractor must, not later than 10 days after execution of the Contract
and before submitting its first Pay Request, submit to Owner a schedule
showing the value of each component part of such Work in form and
with substantiating data acceptable to Owner (`Breakdown Schedule").
The sum of the items listed in the Breakdown Schedule must equal the
amount or amounts set forth in the Schedule of Prices for Lump Sum
Work. An unbalanced Breakdown Schedule providing for overpayment
of Contractor on component parts of the Work to be performed first
will not be accepted. The Breakdown Schedule must be revised and
resubmitted until acceptable to Owner. No payment may be made for
any lump sum item until Contractor has submitted, and Owner has
approved, an acceptable Breakdown Schedule.
Owner may require that the approved Breakdown Schedule be revised
based on developments occurring during the provision and performance
of the Work. if Contractor fails to submit a revised Breakdown
Schedule that is acceptable to Owner, Owner will have the right either
to suspend Progress and Final Payments for Lump Sum Work or to
make such Payments based on Owner's determination of the value of
the Work completed.
-5-
ATTACHMENT A
(2) Unit Price Items. For all Work to be paid on a unit price basis, the
value of such Work will be determined by Owner on the basis of the
actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and
complete in place, multiplied by the applicable Unit Price set forth in
the Schedule of Prices. The actual number of acceptable units installed
and complete in place will be measured on the basis described in
Attachment B to the Contract or, in the absence of such description, on
the basis determined by Owner. The number of units of Unit Price
Items stated in the Schedule of Prices are Owner's estimate only and
may not be used in establishing the Progress or Final Payments due
Contractor. The Contract Price will be adjusted to reflect the actual
number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and complete
in place upon Final Acceptance.
C. Application of Payments. All Progress and Final Payments made by Owner to
Contractor will be applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with
respect to which they were paid and will not be applied to or used for any pre-
existing or unrelated debt between Contractor and Owner or between
Contractor and any third party.
9. Per Diem Administrative Charge:
$500 per day.
10. Standard Specifications:
The Contract also includes Owner's Village Code and Building Codes.
References to any of these codes means the latest editions effective on the date of the bid
opening.
See Attachment D for any special project requirements.
-6-
ATTACHMENT B
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
ATTACHMENT B
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 00 0101
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADES
1200 OAK BROOK ROAD
OAK BROOK, IL 60523-2255
OWNER
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
1200 OAK BROOK ROAD
OAK BROOK, IL 60523-2255
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER
KLUBER ARCHITECTS + ENGINEERS
10 S. SHUMWAY AVE,
BATAVIA, ILLINOIS 60510
END OF DOCUMENT
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 00 01 01 -1 DOCUMENT 00 0101
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PROJECT TITLE PAGE
SECTION 00 0107
SEALS PAGE
1.01 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS' SEALS
A. ARCHITECT
B, STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
C. MECHANICAL ENGINEER D. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
END OF DOCUMENT
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 00 01 07 -1 DOCUMENT 00 0107
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SEALS PAGE
SECTION 00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
PAGES
Introductory Information
0001 01 Project Title Page
1
000107 Seals Page
1
0001 10 Table of Contents
3
0001 15 Drawing index
1
SPECIFICATIONS
PAGES
Division 01 -- General Requirements
01 1000 Summary
2
01 3000 Administrative Requirements (1 page attachment)
5
01 4000 Quality Requirements
6
01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements
2
01 4200 References
5
01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls
3
01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
7
01 6000 Product Requirements (1 page attachment)
4
01 7000 Execution and Closeout Requirements
9
01 7700 Closeout Procedures
2
01 7800 Closeout Submittals
4
01 7900 Demonstration and Training
3
Division 02 -- Existing Conditions
024100 Demolition
3
Division 03 •• Concrete
03 1000 Concrete Forming and Accessories
4
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing
2
03 30 00 Cast -in -Place Concrete
6
Division 04 -• Masonry
04 20 00 Unit Masonry
6
04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry
4
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0001 10-1
DOCUMENT 00 01 10
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 07 -- Thermal and Moisture Protection
07 9200 Joint Sealants 2
Division 09 -- Finishes
09 91 13 Exterior Painting 4
Division 23 -• Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning (HVAC)
2311 13
Facility Fuel -Oil Piping
3
Division 26 -- Electrical
26 05 00
Basic Electrical Requirements
3
26 05 01
Minor Electrical Demolition
2
26 05 02
Electrical Identification
2
2605 19
Conductors and Devices
8
26 05 29
Supporting Devices
2
26 05 35
Raceways and Boxes
8
262100
Low -Voltage Electrical Service Entrance
4
262413
Service and Distribution
5
2632 13
Engine Generators
16
26 36 00
Transfer Switches
5
Division 31 -- Earthwork
31 22 00
Grading
3
312316.13
Trenching
4
Division 32 -- Exterior Improvements
3292 19
Seeding
3
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0001 10- 2 DOCUMENT 00 01 10
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 00 0115
DRAWING INDEX
GENERAL
G100 COVER SHEET, GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS & DRAWING INDEX
ARCHITECTURAL
A101 EQUIPMENT WALL DETAILS
ELECTRICAL
E010
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LIST & PANEL SCHEDULES
E100
ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN
E300
ELECTRICAL LOWER LEVEL POWER PLAN
E310
ELECTRICAL MAIN LEVEL POWER PLAN
E630
ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE RISER DIAGRAM & DETAILS
END OF DOCUMENT
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0001 15-1 DOCUMENT 00 0115
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.: All Rights Reserved DRAWING INDEX
SECTION 0110 00
SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT
A. Project Name: VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADES.
B. Owner's Name; Village of Oak Brook.
C. Architect/Engineer's Name: Kluber Architects f Engineers.
1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
A. Contract Type. A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in the Village of
Oak Brook Contract for the Construction of Electrical Systems Upgrades Bid Package document.
1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK
A. Scope of demolition and removal work is shown on drawings and specified in Section 02 4100.
B. Scope of alterations work is shown on drawings.
C. New exterior masonry equipment enclosure and equipment pads.
D. Coordination with Commonwealth Edison Company of all efforts to demolish existing service,
construction of new service location and de-energization and re-energization of electrical utility for
the orderly progress and completion of the work.
E, Construction of new electrical service, transfer switch and distribution systems for Village Hall,
Public Works and Fire Station electrical distribution systems as indicated and reasonably inferable
in the contract documents.
F. Construction of Commonwealth Edison Co. primary empty conduit system and utility pad
construction in accordance with utility company requirements,
G. Construction of optional standby packaged engine generator set at public works electrical
distribution.
H. Retro -fit of existing Village Hall packaged generator to add remote annunciator panel at locations
indicated on the drawings,
1. Temporary electrical service for outages that exceed a duration of 12 hours for the continued
operation of the village complex.
J. Retro -fit of existing Village Hall electrical distribution to eliminate metering and service entrance
equipment as generally indicated or reasonably inferable in the contract documents.
K. Demolition of existing Village Hall pad -mount utility transformer, service lateral conductors and
de -energized Utility primary feeder,
L. Restoration of site landscaping due to construction, demolition, excavation and directional boring
activities.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 10 00 - 1 SECTION 01 10 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SUMMARY
1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire
construction period.
B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations,
C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.
1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.
B, Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner
1, Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during
construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered.
2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit,
C. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage.
D. Utility Outages and Shutdown:
1, Limit disruption of utility services to hours the building is unoccupied.
2, Do not disrupt or shut down life safety systems, including but not limited to fire sprinklers and
fire alarm system, without 7 days notice to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction,
3. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 10 00-2 SECTION 01 10 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved SUMMARY
SECTION 0130 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preconstruction meeting.
B. Progress meetings.
C. Construction progress schedule.
D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
E. Architect/Engineer-provided CAD files,
F. Number of copies of Submittals.
G. Submittal procedures,
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. Additional coordination requirements,
B. Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A, ArchitectlEngineer will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.
B, Attendance required:
1. Owner,
2, ArchitectlEngineer,
3. Contractor.
C. Agenda;
1, Arch itectlEngineer will prepare and provide Agenda for this meeting only.
D, Architect will provide minutes and distribute copies to all participants for this meeting only.
Participants to distribute to other parties as they see required to have.
3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings.
B. Attendance Required;
1, Contractor.
2. Owner,
3. ArchitectlEngineer.
4. Contractor's Superintendent,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 30 00 -1 SECTION 01 30 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
C. Agenda:
1, Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions,
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
5. Review of Submittals schedule and status of Submittals,
6, Maintenance of progress schedule.
7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
11, Other business relating to Work.
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 days after meeting to participants, with copies to
Architect/Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Within 7 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule,
B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 7 days.
C. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
3.04 Submittals FOR REVIEW
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
B. Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection,
D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with Submittal PROCEDURES article
below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
3.05 Submittals FOR INFORMATION
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:
1. Design data.
2. Certificates,
3. Test reports,
4. inspection reports.
5. Manufacturer's instructions.
6. Manufacturer's field reports.
7. Other types indicated.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 01 3000-2 SECTION 0130 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
B. Submit for Arch itectlEngineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will
be taken,
3.06 Submittals FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion,
C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at Project Closeout:
1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Other types as indicated.
D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after Project completion.
3.07 ARC HITECTIENGINEER-PROVIDED CAD FILES
A. After the execution of the Contract, Arch itectlEngineer will provide, free of charge, upon receipt of
a properly completed and signed request utilizing "Electronic Data Transfer Consent Form" at the
end of this Specification Section, CAD files depicting graphic information for the project as follows:
1. Architectural Floor Plans; Column grid, walls, floors, stairs, doors, windows, room numbers,
ceiling grid, mechanical diffusers, plumbing fixtures, sprinkler heads (if depicted in Bid
Documents) and lights,
B. Contractor acknowledges and accepts that the Architectural Floor Plans do not contain structural,
mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire protection and other building systems information depicted in
the Bidding Documents. Examples of information not contained in these files include, but are not
limited to, title blocks, keynotes, schedules, mechanical ductwork and equipment, electrical device
symbols, circuit numbers and home runs, plumbing equipment, piping runs and riser diagrams,
and arch itecturallengineering text or details. No other CAD files, data or information will be
provided.
C, Only requests from Prime Contractors will be honored. Subcontractors must obtain the files from
their respective Prime Contractors,
D. In submitting a request, Contractor acknowledges that;
1. Architect/Engineer bears no responsibility for the data or its transmission,
2. Use of the data by the Contractor or his Subcontractors in no way relieves the Contractor of his
obligations under the Contract,
3. Contractor is solely liable for any and all claims arising from any and all products generated by
the Contractor or its Subcontractors employing the data,
4. Contractor and its Subcontractors have a limited, non-exclusive license to use the data solely in
connection with the Work of the Project, and that
5. Arch itectlEngineer retains all rights, including copyright, to the data.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 0130 00-3 SECTION 0130 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF Submittals
A. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically -marked up file
will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right -side up; illegible files will be rejected.
B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be
retained by ArchitecUEngineer,
1. After review, produce duplicates.
2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.
3.09 Submittal PROCEDURES
A. Shop Drawing Procedures:
1, Prepare accurate, drawn -to -scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting the
Contract Documents and coordinating related Work.
2. Generic, non -project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the
requirements for shop drawings.
B. Transmit each Submittal with a copy of approved Submittal form.
C. Transmit each Submittal with AIA Form G810,
D. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise Submittals with original number and a sequential
alphabetic suffix.
E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and
specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.
F, Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of
Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is
in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
G. Deliver Submittals to ArchitecUEngineer at business address.
H. Schedule Submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
1. For each Submittal for review, allow 20 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor,
J. Clearly identify variations from the Contract Documents. Regardless of the type of variation,
Contractor is solely responsible for errors in the field that arise from Submittal variations from the
requirements of the Contract Documents if those variations were not expressly noted to specifically
identify for and describe to the reviewer the nature of the variation from the Contract Documents.
K. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
L. Correlate submitted items with specified products; clearly indicate the specified product that
corresponds to each submitted item,
M. When options or optional features available for a Product are indicated in a Submittal, and
selections for those options/features are indicated in the Contract Documents, identify on the
Submittal the selection indicated in the Contract Documents.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 0130 00-4 SECTION 01 30 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.: Ali Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
N, Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps,
0. When revised for resubmission, using clouds, highlights or other means acceptable to the
Architect, identify all changes made since previous submission. Resubmittals that do not clearly
identify all changes may be delayed and/or returned to the Contractor unreviewed.
P. The Contractor is entitled to 1 Resubmittals of any Shop Drawing, Product Data, or Closeout
Submittal item rejected by the Architect or returned by the Architect for further action. Thereafter,
the Contractor shall pay the cost of all further Architect's reviews of Shop Drawing, Product Data or
Closeout Submittal, at a rate of $200.00/hour, Cost of such further reviews will be deducted from
the Contract Sum by Change Order.
Q. Distribute reviewed Submittals as appropriate, Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to
comply with requirements.
R. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed,
S. Submittal reviews may be delayed and/or Submittals may be returned unreviewed for any of the
following reasons:
Submittals submitted outside the scheduled dates of the Submittal Schedule,
2, Submittals are incomplete or are missing information,
3, Submittals are not submitted in accordance with procedures outlined in this Section (i.e. spec
Section number not indicated, missing Contractor's review stamp, submitted items not
correlated with specified products).
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 01 30 00 - 5 SECTION 0130 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Kluber
Archolects - Engineers
ELECTRONIC DATA TRANSFER CONSENT FORM
Project: Village of Oak Brook
Electrical Systems Upgrades
1200 Oak Brook Road
Oak Brook, IL 60523
Kluber Project: 15-172-1017
Owner: Village of Oak Brook
KLUBER, INC,, an Illinois corporation, is providing electronic data to you solely at your request and for your
convenience. By accepting and opening any of the electronic data files, you agree that Kluber, Inc. bears no liability
for the data or its transmission to you and that you are solely liable for any and all claims referring or relating to any
and all products you, or your Subcontractors, may generate with the data.
You acknowledge that you have a limited non-exclusive license to use the information solely in connection with your
work on the project captioned above, and that Kluber, Inc. retains all rights, including copyright, to the data.
Acknowledged by.
Company:
Date:
(Printed Name) (Signature)
Email:
Architectural Floor Plans are transmitted for the contractors' use as backgrounds for shop drawings and as -built
drawings, and, as such, contain graphic information for column grid, walls, floors, stairs, doors, windows, room
numbers, ceiling grid, lights, receptacles, diffusers and sprinkler heads where indicated on Bid Documents. Plans do
not contain title blocks, keynotes, schedules, mechanical ductwork and equipment, electrical device symbols, circuit
numbers and home runs, plumbing equipment, piping runs and riser diagrams, and arch itectu rallengineering text and
details. Plans depict entire floors and are not formatted, partial plans as depicted in the Bidding Documents. Files are
provided in R2000 .DWG format.)
SECTION 0140 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1,01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality assurance.
B. Sequencing and scheduling of the work with testing and inspections.
C. Testing and inspection agencies and services,
D. Control of installation.
E, Tolerances,
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 014100 - Regulatory Requirements,
B. Section 0142 00 - References,
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008
(Reapproved 2014).
B. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2014,
C. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2013,
D. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing
and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2012a.
E. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or
Testing; 2014a.
F. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2013.
G. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor
Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008),
H. ASTM C391C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2010,
L ASTM C1091C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2 -in. or (50 -mm) Cube Specimens); 2008,
J. ASTM C1431C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic -Cement Concrete; 2010a,
K. ASTM C1731C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2010b.
L. ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile;
2009.
PROJECT N0. 15-172-1017 01 40 00 - 1 SECTION 0140 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
M. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units; 2011,
N. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars
for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2010.
0. ASTM C1148 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar;
1992a (Reapproved 2008) .
P. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2010.
Q. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength; 2009.
R. ASTM E514 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry ; 2009,
S. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination; 2009,
1.44 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Design Data: Submit for Arch itecVE ngi neer's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited
purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in
the contract documents, or for Owner's information.
C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to
ArchitectlEngineer and to Contractor.
1. Include;
a. Date issued,
b. Project title and number.
c. Name of inspector.
d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
e. Identification of product and specifications section.
f. Location in the Project.
g. Type of test/inspection,
h. Date of test/inspection.
i. Results of testlinspection.
j. Conformance with Contract Documents.
k. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of results,
D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Arch itectlEngineer, in
quantities specified for Product Data.
1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting
reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the
Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention,
and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0140 00- 2 SECTION 0140 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER INC.; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS - See Section 01 41 00
1.06 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS - See Section 0142 00
1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES
A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified
testing and inspection, except where specifically indicated otherwise in the Schedule of Tests and
Inspections.
B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance
with requirements of Contract Documents.
C, Contractor Employed Agency;
1. Testing agency; Comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021, ASTM
C1077, ASTM C1093, and ASTM D3740.
2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329,
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Soils Testing: As each portion of the Work is completed, notify testing laboratory to perform
compaction and moisture density tests.
1, Test compaction of existing and placed materials no more than seven (7) days prior to
placement of the next portion of the Work, and only when no rain is expected between the time
of the test and the placement of the next portion of the Work.
2. Proceed promptly with additional portions of the Work only after satisfactory results have been
verified in writing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers` instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Arch itect)E ngineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality,
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014000-3 SECTION 0140 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do
not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding,
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place,
3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Testing Agency Duties:
1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in
performance of services.
2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.
3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
4. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or
non-conformance of Work or products.
5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect/Engineer.
6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified,
B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
1. Agency may not release, revoke, after, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
4, Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
C. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used
that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers'
facilities.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b, To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested /inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples,
4. Notify Architect/Engineer and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations
requiring test! nglinspection services.
5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples,
tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required
by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
D. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by
the same agency on instructions by Architect/Engineer.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014000-4 SECTION 0140 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.: All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
E. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor.
3.04 SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:
A. Concrete Testing and Inspection: Owner's Testing Service.
1. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing;
a. Inspect reinforcement for bar size, quantity, cover and support prior to casting concrete,
2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete:
a. Compressive strength tests: ASTM C172 and ASTM C39.
a) Samples for each day's pour greater than 5 cubic yards. Sample every 50 cubic yards.
b) Sample shall consist of 4 specimens. Break schedule: 1 at 7 days, 2 at 28 days and
final held for possible future break if directed by Architect/Engineer.
c) Slump: ASTM C 143; one for each set of test cylinders.
d) Air Content: ASTM C 231.
e) Concrete Temperature; ASTM C 1064.
f) Unit Weight: ASTM C 567.
g) Take one additional cylinder during cold weather, cured on site under same conditions
as the concrete it represents.
b. Measure F(F) and F(L) in accordance with ASTM E1155, within 48 hours after slab
installation; report both composite overall values and local values for each measured
section,
B. Masonry Testing and Inspection: Owner's Testing Service.
1. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry:
a. Masonry mortar tests: ASTM C 270.
b. Masonry grout tests: ASTM C 1019.
c. Inspect masonry anchorage and reinforcement for placement, bar size, quantity, spacing,
and lap lengths.
d. Masonry Assemblies: Tested in accordance with the provisions of ACI 530.11ASCE6ITMS
602.
C. Soils Testing: Owner's Testing Service,
1. Section 3123 16 - Excavation, Section 3123 16.13 - Trenching, Section 31 23 23 - Fill, and
Section 32 1123 Aggregate Base Courses:
a. Test and inspect subgrades and each fill or backfill layer.
b. Building pad and footing subgrades to verify design bearing capacities. Perform testing in
accordance with project soils report,
c. Test compaction of soils ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937
as applicable,
d. Paved and building slab areas subgrade at least one test for every 2,500 square feet.
e, Foundation backfill compaction of initial and final layer. Perform at least one test every 200
feet.
3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor
within 24 hours of test.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014000-5 SECTION 0140 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner will direct an
appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 014000-6 SECTION 0140 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 41 00
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General,
B. Definitions.
C, Quality Assurance.
D. Regulatory Requirements.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 10 00 -Summary.
B. Section 0142 00 - References.
1.03 GENERAL
A. Comply with all applicable laws, rules, regulations, codes and ordinances.
B. If the Contractor observes that the Contract Documents may be at variance with specified codes,
notify the Architect/Engineer immediately. Arch itecVEng ineer shall issue all changes in accordance
with the General Conditions,
C. It shall not be the Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Contract Documents
are in accordance with all applicable laws, rules and regulations, however, when the Contractor
performs work knowing or having reason to know that the work in question is contrary to applicable
laws, rules, and regulations, and fails to notify the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall pay all
costs arising therefrom.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A, Definitions:
1, Codes; Codes are statutory requirements, rules or regulations of governmental entities.
2. Standards Standards are requirements that have been established as accepted criteria, set
general consent.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Architect/Engineer has designed the project to applicable code requirements and has copies
of said codes available for the Contractors inspection.
B. The Contractor shall,
1, Ensure that copies of codes and standards referenced herein or specified in individual
specifications sections are available to Contractor's personnel, agents, and Sub -Contractors,
2. Ensure that Contractor's personnel, agents, and Sub -Contractors are familiar with the
workmanship and requirements of applicable codes and standards.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 41 00 - 1 SECTION 01 41 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; AIS Rights Reserved REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A, Source and Requirements: Verity amendments with local code officials,
1, Local code requirements:
a. ICC International Building Code, 2009 Edition.
b. ICC International Mechanical Code, 2009 Edition.
c. ICC International Fire Code, 2009 Edition.
d. ICC International Property Maintenance Code, 2009 Edition.
e. ICC Electrical Code, 2000 Edition,
2, State code requirements:
a. Capital Development Board (CDB): Illinois Accessibility Code, 1997 Edition.
b. Illinois Department of Labor (IDOL): Safety Glazing Materials Act - Illinois Revised Statutes,
chap. 111 112, paragraph 3101, et seq.
c. Illinois Department of Public Health (IDPH):
a) Illinois Plumbing Code (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 77, Chapter I, Subchapter r,
Part 890).
Illinois Environmental Protection Agency (TEPA):
a) Air -Pollution Standards.
b) Eloise Pollution Standards.
c) Water Pollution Standards.
d) Public Water Supplies
e) Solid Waste Standards.
f) Illinois Recommended Standards for Sewage Work.
e. Illinois State Fire Marshal (OSFM):
a) Boiler & Pressure Vessel Safety Code (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 44, Chapter 1,
Part 120).
b) Illinois Rules & Regulations for Fire Prevention & Safety (as amended).
c) Gasoline and Volatile Oils (Illinois Revised Statutes, chap. 17 112, paragraph 31, et
seq.).
3. Information and Requirements for Utility Services: Local utility companies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1D17 044100-2 SECTION 01 41 00
Copyright 2D16 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 0142 00
REFERENCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Drawing symbols, abbreviations and acronyms.
B. Definitions of terms used throughout the Contract Documents.
C. Explanation of specification format and content.
D. Requirements relating to referenced standards,
E. Applicability of referenced standards.
F. List of industry organizations and certain of their respective documents.
1,02 DRAWING SYMBOLS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Abbreviations and graphic symbols are defined on the General Notes, Symbols & Abbreviations
sheet of the drawings.
B. Generally, symbols used on the mechanical and electrical drawings conform to those
recommended by ASHRAE, though, where appropriate, these symbols are supplemented by more
specific symbols as recommended by ASME, ASPE, or the IEEE.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Where the terms "indicated", "noted", "scheduled", "shown", or "specified" are used it is to help
locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended except as specifically noted.
B. Where the terms "directed", "requested", "authorized", "approved", are used as in "directed by the
Arch itectlEngineer", no implied meaning shall be construed to extend the Architect/Engineer's
responsibilities into the Contractor's purview of construction supervision.
C. Where the term "approved" is used in conjunction with the Arch itectlEngin eer's action on
submittals, requests or applications it is limited to the duties of the Architect/Engineer as described
in the Agreement, and the General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract. Such use of the
term "approval" shall not limit or release the Contractor from his responsibility to fulfill Contract
requirements,
D. Where the term "regulations" is used it means all applicable statutes, laws, ordinances, and orders
issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as construction industry standards, rules, or
conventions that address performance of the Work.
E. Where the term "furnish" is used it means supply, deliver, and unload to the construction site ready
for assembly and incorporation into the Work,
F. Where the term "install" is used it is meant to describe operations at the job site to include
unloading, assembling, placing, anchoring, finishing, protecting, cleaning and all other similar
operations required to fully incorporate an item into the Work,
G, Where the term "provide" is used it means "furnish and install" as defined above.
PROJECT NO, 15-172.1017 01 42 00 -1 SECTION 0142 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES
H. The "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction
activities, The Project Site may be for the exclusive use of the Contractor and his activities or may
be used in conjunction with others with others performing other construction or related activities on
the Project, The Extent of the Project Site is indicated on the drawings,
1.04 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT
A. These Specifications are based on the Construction Specification Institute's 49 Division format and
numbering system,
B. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is an abbreviated type.
Implied words and meanings will appropriately interpreted,
C. Requirements expressed in imperative and streamlined language are to be performed by the
Contractor, At certain locations in the text, subjective language may be used to describe
responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or others.
1. Whenever a colon (:) us used within a sentence or phrase, it shall be construed to mean the
words "shall be".
D. Use of certain terms such as "carpentry" is not intended to imply that certain activities must be
performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name. The
Specifications do, however, require that certain construction activities shall be performed by
specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. Specialists shall be used
for said activities, however the final responsibility for fulfilling the requirements of the Contract
remains the Contractor's,
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in
the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the
standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue specified in this section, except where a specific
date is established by applicable code.
C, Obtain copies of standards when required by the Contract Documents.
D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until
Substantial Completion,
E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
the Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those
of the Architect/Engineer shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference
otherwise in any reference document.
1.06 APPLICABILITY OF INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Construction industry standards shall have the same force and effect as if bound or copied
directly in the Contract Documents, except where more stringent requirements are specified. All
such applicable standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 014200-2 SECTION 0142 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES
1. Where compliance with two or more standards are referenced and conflicting requirements for
quality or quantities occur, comply with the more stringent requirements. Refer questions
regarding apparently conflicting standards to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
2. The standard of quality or quantity levels specified, shown, or referenced shall be the minimum
to be provided or performed. Refer questions regarding standards of minimum quality or
quantity to the Architect before proceeding.
1.07 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ORGANIZATIONS AND DOCUMENTS
A. AA --ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION, INC.
B. AABC -- ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL
C. AAMA --AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
D. AASHTO -- AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION
OFFICIALS
E. AC[ -- AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL
F. AISC -- AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC.
G. ANSI -- AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
H. ASHRAE -- AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
ENGINEERS, INC.
I. ASME -- THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
1. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; 2004.
J. ASTM -- AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS
K. AWI -- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE
L. AWPA -- AMERICAN WOOD -PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION
M. AWS -- AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY
N. BHMA -- BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
0. BIA -- BRICK INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION
P. CPSC -- CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION
Q. DHI -- DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE
R. DIN -- DEUTSCHES INSTITUT FUR NORMUNG
S. FM - FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION
T. ICC - INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL, INC,
U. IEEE -- INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS
V. ISO -- INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ORGANIZATION
W. MFMA -- MAPLE FLOORING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 014200-3 SECTION 0142 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES
X. NAAMM -- THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS
Y. NCMA - NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION
Z. NEBB -- NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU
AA. NEMA - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
AB. NFPA -- NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION
AC, NRCA -- NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION
AD, PCI -- PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE
AE, SDI STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AF. SDI -- STEEL DECK INSTITUTE, INC.
AG. SGCC -- SAFETY GLAZING CERTIFICATION COUNCIL
AH. SIGMA - SEALED INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (See IGMA)
AI. SJI -- STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE
AJ.SMACNA -- SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL
ASSOCIATION, INC.
AK. SSPC -- THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS
AL. TCA -- TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA, INC,
AM. UL -- UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.
AN. USG -- UNITED STATES GYPSUM
1. USG (HB) - Gypsum Construction Handbook; Seventh Edition.
A0. WWPA -- WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION
1.08 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIES/DOCUMENTS
A. CFR -- CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
B. CPSC -- CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION
C, EPA -- ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
D. FS -- FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS (General Services Administration)
E. GSA -- U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION
F. USGS -- UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
1.09 STATE GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIESIDOCUMENTS
A, CDB -- ILLINOIS CAPITAL DEVELOPMENT BOARD
B. IDOL -- ILLINOIS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
C, IDPH ILLINOIS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 014200-4 SECTION 0142 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved REFERENCES
D. IEPA -- ILLINOIS ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
E. OSFM -- OFFICE OF THE ILLINOIS STATE FIRE MARSHAL.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 0142 00-5 SECTION 0142 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; Ali Rights Reserved REFERENCES
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1,01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary utilities,
B. Temporary telecommunications services.
C. Temporary sanitary facilities,
D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.
E. Security requirements.
F. Vehicular access and parking.
G. Waste removal facilities and services.
1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - See Section 01 5100
A. Owner will provide the following:
1. Electrical power and metering, consisting of connection to existing facilities.
2. Water supply, consisting of connection to existing facilities.
B. Existing facilities may be used.
C. Use trigger -operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.
1.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project
mobilization.
B. Telecommunications services shall include,
1. One (1) mobile cellular telephone for each of Contractor's and any Subcontractor's field
personnel.
2, Email: Account/address reserved for project use.
1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Use of existing facilities is permitted,
B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition,
C. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition as originally found.
1.05 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas
that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect
existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and
demolition,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 015000-1 SECTION 0150 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public
rights-of-way .
C. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants,
D. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.06 FENCING
A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.
B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with
locks.
1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working
conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required
ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of
unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.
1.0E INTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary partitions as indicated to separate work areas from Owner -occupied areas, to
prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner -occupied areas, and to prevent damage to
existing materials and equipment.
B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed
edges at intersections with existing surfaces:
1.09 SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from
unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
B. Coordinate with Owner's security program.
1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities,
and access for emergency vehicles.
B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.
C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
E. Existing parking areas may be used for construction parking.
1.11 WASTE REMOVAL
A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly
condition.
B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 015000-2 SECTION 0150 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
C. If materials to be recycled or re -used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable
non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure
unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.
D, Open free -fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with
lids,
1.12 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion
inspection.
B, Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated,
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS • NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION . NOT USED
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 015000-3 SECTION 0150 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
SECTION 0157 13
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities.
B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers
due to construction activities,
C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures,
D. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to cion -compliance by
Contractor.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D43551D4355M - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to
Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2014,
B. ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity; 1999a
(Reapproved 2014).
C. ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2011,
D. ASTM D46321D4632M - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of
Geotextiles; 2015a,
E. ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile;
2012.
F. ASTM D4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and
Samples; 2002 (Reapproved 2009).
G. EPA (NPDES) - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Construction General
Permit; Current Edition.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all requirements of U.S. Environmental Protection Agency for erosion and
sedimentation control, as specified for the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
(NPDES), Phases I and ll, under requirements for the 2003 Construction General Permit (CGP),
whether the project is required by law to comply or not.
B. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection
reports.
C. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until
applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable
permits,
1. Obtain and pay for permits and provide security required by authority having jurisdiction.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 0157 13-1 SECTION 0157 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
D. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover
and before precipitation occurs,
E. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due
to construction activities for this project.
1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in
excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is
less.
2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that
might occur in 25 years,
F. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to
construction activities for this project.
1, Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil,
2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic,
3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no
cost to Owner.
G. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by
water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project.
1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site.
2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site.
3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements.
4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas of no
cost to Owner.
H. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site,
including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers.
1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to
Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. if sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove
deposited sediment after each storm.
I. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site; Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site,
including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers.
1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to
Owner; remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
J. Open Water; Prevent standing water that could become stagnant.
K. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been
established,
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for Submittal procedures.
B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan:
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0157 13-2 SECTION 0157 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
1. Submit not less than 30 days prior to anticipated start of clearing, grading, or other work
involving disturbance of ground surface cpver.
2. Include;
a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas vulnerable to
erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage.
b. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, and other
temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures.
c. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volume
calculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures.
d. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities.
e. Other information required by law.
f. Format required by law is acceptable, provided any additional information specified is also
included.
3. Obtain the approval of the Pian by authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Obtain the approval of the Plan by Owner,
C. Certificate; Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with
specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual
minimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers.
D. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate
condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A, Mulch: Use one of the following:
1. Straw or hay.
2. Erosion control matting or netting.
B. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover; Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and
intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use
species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons.
C. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales.
1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum.
2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension.
D. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long:
1, Steel U- or T -section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot.
2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section.
E. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and
insects; non -biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the following
minimum average roll lengths;
1, Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D4751.
2. Permittivity: 0.05 se0-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491,
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 0157 13-3 SECTION 0157 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
3, Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in
accordance with ASTM D4355 after 500 hours exposure.
4. Tensile Strength: 100 Ib -f, minimum, in cross -machine direction; 124 lb -f, minimum, in machine
direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632.
5. Elongation; 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632.
6. Tear Strength: 55 lb -f, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4533,
7. Color; Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted.
F. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long:
1, Steel U- or T -section, with minimum mass of 1.33 Ib per linear foot.
2. Softwood, 4 by 4 inches in cross section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such
existing features to greatest extent possible.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time.
3.03 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES
A. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive
measures are not required.
Construction Entrances: Traffic -bearing aggregate surface.
1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum.
2. Length: 50 feet, minimum.
3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way.
4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out
of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin.
C. Linear Sediment Barriers; Made of silt fences.
1. Provide linear sediment barriers:
a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles,
b, Along the top of the slope or top bank of drainage channels and swales that traverse
disturbed areas.
c. Along the toe of cut slopes and fill slopes.
d. Perpendicular to flow across the bottom of existing and new drainage channels and swales
that traverse disturbed areas or carry runoff from disturbed areas; space at maximum of 200
feet apart.
e. Across the entrances to culverts that receive runoff from disturbed areas.
2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier:
a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet.
b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet,
c, Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet.
d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet.
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 0157 13-4 SECTION 01 57 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
e, Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet.
D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following
measures:
1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one
piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent
dislodging; orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet.
2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement.
E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings,
F. Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at
downspout outlets and storm water outlets.
G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures:
1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges.
2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark, wood chips, or
shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay.
H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months.
1. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Traffic -Bearing Aggregate Surface:
1, Excavate minimum of 6 inches.
2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints.
3. Place and compact at least 6 inches of 1.5 to 3.5 inch diameter stone.
B. Silt Fences:
1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873,
2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use
nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6.feet maximum, with
fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground,
3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal
28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric
embedded at least 6 inches in ground.
4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more
than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts
spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground.
5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified.
6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping at
least 18 inches, with extra post,
7. Fasten fabric to wood posts using one of the following:
a. Four 314 inch diameter, 1 inch long, 14 gage nails,
b. Five 17 -gage staples with 3/4 inch wide crown and 112 inch legs.
8. Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 0157 13-5 SECTION 0157 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
9. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or
other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12
inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet.
C. Straw Bale Rows:
1, Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly, with one bale at each end of row
turned uphill,
2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground.
3. Embed bales at least 4 inches in the ground.
4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale, driven at least 18 inches into the ground; drive
first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force bales together,
5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly.
6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted.
D. Mulching Over Large Areas:
1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 2-112 tons per acre; anchor using dull disc harrow or emulsified
asphalt applied using same spraying machine at 100 gallons of water per ton of mulch.
2. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions,
E. Mulching Over Small and Medium Areas:
1. Dry Straw and Hay: Apply 4 to 6 inches depth.
2. Erosion Control Matting: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Temporary Seeding:
1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required.
2, When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes,
and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to
allow seed to lodge and germinate.
3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1
pound per 1000 sq ft.
4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft.
5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding.
6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 112 to 1 inch deep.
7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without causing
runoff or erosion.
8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5
inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall.
B. Repair deficiencies immediately.
C. Silt Fences:
1, Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed.
2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence.
3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other
causes.
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 0157 13-6 SECTION 0157 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
D. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site.
E. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site.
3.06 CLEAN UP
A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to
remain by Architect/Engineer,
B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures.
C, Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable
grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces,
END OF SECTION
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 0157 13-7 SECTION 0157 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
SECTION 0160 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General product requirements.
B. Re -use of existing products,
C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
D. Product option requirements.
E. Substitution limitations and procedures.
F, Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'
standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical
characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for
functional equipment and appliances.
C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work,
1, For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's
standard colors, textures, and patterns,
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS
A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required
or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly
upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner,
C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re -used, relocated,
reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner,
become the property of the Contractor; remove from site,
D. Reused Products; Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or
other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified.
2.02 NEW PRODUCTS
A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents,
B. Designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with industry standards.
PROJECT N0. 15-172-1017 01 60 00 -1 SECTION D1 60 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting
those standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A, Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in
individual specification sections.
B. Deliver to Project site and place in location directed by Owner's representative; obtain Owner's
signature on receipt for delivery prior to final payment. Submit signed receipts with Closeout
Submittals,
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Substitutions Prior To Bid Opening: ArchitectlEngineer will consider a written request for
substitution provided that such request is received at least 6 days prior to the Bid opening date.
Requests received after that time will not be considered. If a request is approved, the
Architect/Engineer will issue and appropriate addendum not less than 5 days prior to the Bid
opening date.
B. Substitutions After Notice of Award: Arch itectlEngineer will consider a request for substitution only
under one or more of the following conditions:
1. Substitution is required for compliance with final interpretation of code requirements or
insurance regulations.
2, Specified product is not available through no fault of the Contractor.
1 Specified product is not compatible with other specified mate rials/eq uipment,
4. Manufacturer will not certify or warranty specified product as required,
C, Document each request utilizing Substitution Request Form following this section with complete
data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. incomplete
requests will not be considered.
D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of
the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product,
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work
to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.
5. Will reimburse Owner for ArchitectlEngineer review or redesign services associated with
re -approval by authorities having jurisdiction over the Project.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 016000-2 SECTION 01 60 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUSER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
E. Substitutions of products or product characteristics/components/accessories will not be considered
when they are indicated or implied on Contractor's submittals, without separate written request, or
when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents, whether rejection of said
substitutions is expressly identified by Architect/Engineer on Contractor's submittals or not.
Substitution Submittal Procedure;
1. Submit two copies of request for substitution for consideration. Submit a separate Substitution
Request Form and accompanying documentation for each proposed substitution.
2. Provide the following minimum documentation with each Substitution Request Form:
a. Product identification, manufacturer, product data including dimensions and weight,
performance and installation instructions.
b. Side-by-side itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product,
c. Coordination information including other modifications required as a result of proposed
substitution.
d. Cost information including the effect of the proposed substitution on the Contract Sum.
3. Sign and date the Substitution Request Form.
4. Architect/Engineer will notify submitter in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid
loss of factory calibration.
B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of
packaging.
C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site
storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of
surrounding areas.
F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement,
or damage.
H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to
installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to
excessive materials handling and misapplication,
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 016000-3 SECTION 0160 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; AlI Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment
favorable to product,
E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground,
F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or
protection.
G, Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,
precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other
contaminants.
H. Comply with manufacturers warranty conditions, if any.
I. Do not store products directly on the ground.
J. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
prevent condensation and degradation of products.
K. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
L. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement,
or damage,
M. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products
are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 016000-4 SECTION 0160 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
TO:
PROJECT:
SPECIFIED ITEM:
Section Page Paragra'ph
The undersigned requests consideration of the following:
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:
Description
Attached data includes project description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data
adequate for evaluation of the request, applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.
Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents which the proposed substitution
will require for its proper installation.
The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct:
1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
2. The undersigned will payfor changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailings, and
construction costs caused by the requested substitution.
3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or
specified warranty requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available far the proposed substitution.
The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent
or superior to the specified iters.
Signature
Firm
Address
Date
Telephone
Attachments:
Date
Remarks
By:
For use by the design consultant
[ [ Accepted [ 1 Accepted as noted
[ ] Not Accepted [ ) Received too late
SECTION 0170 00
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or
remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.
C. Pre -installation meetings,
D. Cutting and patching,
E. Surveying for laying out the work.
F. Cleaning and protection.
G. Starting of systems and equipment.
H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
I. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.
J. General requirements for maintenance service.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance
data, warranties and bonds,
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
S. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey
work.
1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of
the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.
C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 0170 DO- 1 SECTION 01 70 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,: All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located
and acceptable to Architect/Engineer, Submit evidence of Surveyors Errors and Omissions
insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate,
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping
equipment.
B. Protect site from puddling or running water, Provide water barriers as required to protect site from
soil erosion.
C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over
adjacent property.
1. Provide dust -proof barriers between construction areas and areas continuing to be occupied by
Owner.
E. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction
operations.
F. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects
from damaging the work.
G. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or
invading premises.
H. Pollution Control; Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water,
and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by
construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with
provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with
building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for
installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment,
D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that
are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit,
as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to
maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0170 00 - 2 SECTION 0170 DO
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements,
F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and
work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching
and extending work.
B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where
necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
described in Section 01 60 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.
Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being
applied or attached.
C, Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize
waste due to over -ordering or misfabrication,
E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.
F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements
subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching, After uncovering existing work,
assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means
acceptance of existing conditions,
3,02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-3 SECTION 0170 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site
prior to commencing work of the section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.
C. Notify Architect/Engineer four days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
E Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies
to Architect/Engineer, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK
A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies discovered.
C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points
during construction.
D. Promptly report to Architect/Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation
required because of changes in grades or other reasons.
E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
without prior written notice to Architect/Engineer.
F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
G. Establish elevations, lines and levels, Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility
locations, slopes, and invert elevations,
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3, Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.
H. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
1. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated,
C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal
lines, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-4 SECTION 0170 00
Copyright 2016 by KL.UBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.06 ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
existing record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions,
B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove items indicated on drawings.
2 Relocate items indicated on drawings.
1 Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and
prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary
for successful application of new finish,
4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces
to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.
C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and
Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new
construction.
1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment
and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access
panel.
2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require
reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as
required.
3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new
services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for
service.
a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of
outages.
b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.
4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.
5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible
ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with
identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction.
D. Protect existing work to remain.
1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
E. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.
PROJECT NO. 15.172-1017 0170 00-5 SECTION 01 70 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
F. Patching; Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface
finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that
the substrate is ready for the new finish.
G. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated;
1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to
remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes,
2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to
match.
H. Clean existing systems and equipment.
1. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do
not burn or bury.
J. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.
K. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.
3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.
C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to;
1. Complete the work.
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work.
D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate
surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to
original condition. ,
E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements,
and sight exposed surfaces.
F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior
approval,
G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents,
H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids
with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetrated
element.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-6 SECTION 0170 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
J. Patching;
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces,
refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
2. Match color, texture, and appearance.
3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections
due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to
repairing finish.
3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or
remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C, Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to
eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose
off-site; do not burn or bury.
3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations,
B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate
work area to prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of
heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials,
F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary,
obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
G, Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if
possible.
3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B, Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage,
C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by
the equipment or system manufacturer.
D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-7 SECTION 0170 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC., All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
representative in accordance with manufacturers` instructions.
F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning
correctly.
3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
A. See Section 0179 00 - Demonstration and Training.
3.12 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
3.13 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.
1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy,
B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and
foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces,
D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or
nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.
E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the
surface and material being cleaned.
F. Clean filters of operating equipment.
G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
1. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of
in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. See Section 0177 00 for additional requirements.
B. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
C. Notify Architect/Engineer when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion,
D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been
inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Architect/Engineer's review.
E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with
requirements for access to Owner -occupied areas.
F. Notify ArchitecUEngineer when work is considered finally complete.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-8 SECTION 0170 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
G. Complete items of work determined by Arch iteclVEngineer's final inspection.
3.15 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one
year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is
longer,
C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and
lubricate as required.
D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace
parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
prior written consent of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017000-9 SECTION 01 70 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 0177 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Substantial Completion Procedures.
B. Final Completion Procedures.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:
A. Section 01 10 00 -Summary.
B. Section 0178 00 - Closeout Submittals,
1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Pre -Substantial Completion Conference:
1, General Contractor to schedule a Pre -substantial Completion Conference 15 days prior to the
date of Substantial Completion, prepare an agenda with copies for the participants and preside
over the meeting.
2, Attendance Required: Contractor, ArchitecUEngineer and Owner.
3, Minimum Agenda;
a. Schedule dates of Substantial Completion and Owner occupancy.
b. Schedule dates for initial Punch Lists of respective Subcontractors to be produced.
c. Schedule date for written request for Substantial Completion.
d. Schedule target date for completion of Initial Punch List items.
e. Schedule delivery times for Owner -furnished items to be installed by Contractor, Owner's
own forces or others under separate Contracts,
f, Schedule dates for Demonstration and Training of equipment and systems specified.
g. Schedule completion dates of testing and balancing reports for engineered Systems.
h. Scheduling and Sequencing of Construction operations around areas partially occupied.
i. Review job site security during transition of Owner occupancy.
j. Schedule dates for final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction for Occupancy
Permits.
k. Review protocol for claims from potential move -in damage.
1. Review procedures for final cleaning.
m. Review potential concerns regarding environmental conditions.
4. Record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants and those
affected by decisions made,
B. Substantial Completion Procedures will be in accordance with the General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction, Article 9.8 and include the following:
1, When the Work or a portion of the Work is considered to be substantially complete, the
Contractor inspects the project and prepares a comprehensive list of outstanding items to be
completed or corrected, Initial Punch List.
2. Contractor submits notice of Substantial Completion.
3. Contractor completes items on the Initial Punch List.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 01 77 00 - 1 SECTION 01 77 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,: All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
4. Arch itecUEngineer inspects the project to verify substantial completion and prepares a Final
Punch List.
5. Arch itecUEngineer prepares Certificate of Substantial Completion, acceptance is required by
Owner and Contractor,
1,04 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Final Completion Procedures will be in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction, Article 9.10, and include the following:
1, When items on Initial and Final Punch Lists are complete, the Contractor submits notice of final
completion and final application for payment.
2. Contractor submits Final Closeout Submittals as specified in Section 0178 00,
3. Architect inspects project and verifies the Work is acceptable and conforms with the Contract
Documents.
4, Architect processes final application for payment and closeout submittals.
1.05 CORRECTION PERIOD
A. Correction Period commences on the date of Substantial Completion and expires one year from
that date.
B. Owner; document non -conforming or defective work over course of Correction Period, Notify
Contractor in writing of nonconforming or defective work. Copy ArchitecUEngineer,
1. Life safety issues requiring immediate corrective work: Contact Contractor for action.
C. Post Construction Walk Through:
1. Time: eleven months after the date of Substantial Completion convene a meeting on site.
2. Attendees: ArchitecUEngineer, Owner's Representative, End User and Maintenance Staff.
3, Minimum Agenda:
a. Review Owner's list of non -conforming or defective work.
b. Conduct a walkthrough of the building and grounds
c. Prepare a list of additional non -conforming or defective work items,
4, Arch itecUEngineer:
a. Prepare written report of findings within two weeks of meeting,
b. Notify Contractor of impending corrective work requiring action,
c. Monitor execution of corrective Work,
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED.
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017700-2 SECTION 0177 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
SECTION 0178 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project Record Documents.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data,
C. Warranties and bonds.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product
data, and samples.
B. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements; Contract closeout procedures.
C. Individual Product Sections; Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
D. individual Product Sections; Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents; Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final
Application for Payment.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1, Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start
of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.
3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be
reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise
content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.
4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.
C. Warranties and Bonds;
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance,
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.
3, For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion,
submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the
warranty period.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017800-1 SECTION 0178 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2, Addenda.
3. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner,
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Record Drawings : Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:
1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements,
2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
3. Field changes of dimension and detail.
4. Details not on original Contract drawings.
3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
B. Product Data; Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data
applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
D. Typed Text As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for
each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions,
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish;
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance; Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and
methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended
schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C, Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed
instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and
maintenance of the specific products.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 017800-2 SECTION 0178 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts,
2, Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.
4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts,
B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed
instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and
maintenance of the specific products.
C. Operating Procedures; Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and
sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include
summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance
and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting,
balancing, and checking instructions.
E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required
for maintenance.
L Additional Requirements; As specified in individual product specification sections,
3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with
data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.
B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for
each system.
C. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.
D. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual,
E. Binders; Commercial quality, 8-112 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic
covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related
consistent groupings.
F, Cover; identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
G. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Arch itectlEngineer, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 017800-3 SECTION 0178 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
H. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the
divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each
volume, with the current volume clearly identified,
Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on
the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major
component parts of equipment.
J. Text; Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.
K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
3.136 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put
into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of
Substantial completion is determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co -execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0178 00-4 SECTION 01 78 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
SECTION 0179 00
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections.
B, Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:
1. Electrical systems and equipment,
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 0191 13 - General Commissioning Requirements: Additional requirements applicable to
demonstration and training.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill -level
of attendees,
1. Submit to Architect/Engineer for transmittal to Owner.
2, Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training.
3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable,
4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions.
5. Include at least the following for each training session:
a, Identification, date, time, and duration.
b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered,
c. fame of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications.
d. Intended audience, such as job description.
e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training.
f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc,
g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc.
h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by
Contractor,
C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees
per training session,
1. Include applicable portion of 0&M manuals,
2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc,, that are not
included in 0&M manuals.
3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance
data,
D. Training Reports:
1, Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration,
2. Sign -in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 79 00 - 1 SECTION 01 79 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to
supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could not
be answered in original training session.
E. Video Recordings; Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session for
Owner's subsequent use.
1. Format: DVD Disc.
2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date,
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the
relevant products and systems.
1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who
actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.
2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary
qualifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL
A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the
purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner,
B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.
C. Operating Equipment and Systems; Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up,
shut -down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance
procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance.
1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion,
2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within six months.
D, Non -Operating Products; Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and
repair procedures,
1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion,
3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL
A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated,
B. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.
C. Provide training in minimum two hour segments,
D. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re -schedule
training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to
conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for
personnel "show -up" time.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 017900-2 SECTION 01 79 00
Copyright 2016 by KLIBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
E. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data; During training discuss;
1. The location of the 0&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies.
2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system
narratives, and product specific information.
3. Typical uses of the 0&M manuals.
Product- and System -Specific Training;
1. Review the applicable 0&M manuals.
2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and
operational strategies.
3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal
changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative
maintenance.
4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.
5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues
and emergency procedures.
6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage.
9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers.
10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor,
11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.
G. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training
session, provide written response within three days.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 01 79 00 - 3 SECTION 0179 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
SECTION 02 4100
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.
B. Section 0150 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers,
and waste removal.
C. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements; Project conditions; protection of bench
marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed
products; temporary bracing and shoring,
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.
B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2013.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications; Company specializing in the type of work required.
1, Minimum of 3 years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 0170 00,
B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent
structures and the public.
1, Obtain required permits.
2, Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241.
3. Use of explosives is not permitted.
4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed;
do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures.
5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the
public.
7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and
occupants.
8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit,
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 02 41 00 -1 SECTION 02 4100
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMOLITION
9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not
obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal
operations.
10.Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will
traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.
C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.
D. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.
E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
1. Provide bracing and shoring,
2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.
3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
F. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice,
flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
G. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify
Arch itectlEngineer and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing
materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.
H. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials.
1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials.
2. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point
or point of reuse.
3.02 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION! FOR ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
existing record documents only,
1, Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be
apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition,
B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied.
1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section
0150 00 in locations indicated on drawings.
C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove items indicated on drawings,
D. Services (Including but not limited to Plumbing and Electrical); Remove existing systems and
equipment as indicated.
1, Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment
and operational components,
2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new
services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for
service.
3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 024100-2 SECTION 02 4100
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMOLITION
4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible
ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with
identification.
E. Protect existing work to remain.
1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
4. Patch as specified for patching new work.
3.03 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A, Remove debris, junk, and trash from site,
B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 024100-3 SECTION 02 4100
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved DEMOLITION
SECTION 0310 00
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A, Formwork for cast -in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage,
B. Openings for other work,
C. Form accessories,
D. Form stripping,
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete,
1,03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010,
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012),
C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata
2016),
D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.
E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009,
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A, Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code
requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and distension,
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318,
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL
A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast -in-place
concrete work.
B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape,
lines, and dimensions,
C. Chamfer outside corners of beams, joists, columns, and wails.
D. Comply with applicable State and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and
removal of formwork,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 03 10 00 - 1 SECTION 03 10 00
Copyright 2046 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
E. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318.
2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.
2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or
discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and
form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.
1. Composition: Colorless mineral oil-based compound,
2, Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds.
B. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners; Rigid plastic type; 314 x 314 inch size; maximum possible
lengths.
C. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and
character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree
with drawings.
3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete
during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings.
F. Provide fillet and chamfer strips on external corners of exposed corners.
G. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to
formwork.
H. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over
reinforcement, request instructions from Architect/Engineer before proceeding,
I. Provide continuous 2x4 minimum keyway in top of all footings as depicted on the drawings.
3.03 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 03 10 00-2 SECTION 03 10 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied
coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water.
Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete
work.
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and
plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted
sa joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.05 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete,
1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water
and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do
not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within
heated enclosure, Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.06 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork
design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 2 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do
not patch formwork.
3.08 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own
weight and imposed loads.
B, Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete
surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 03 1000-3 SECTION 03 10 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged
forms.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1617 63 1000-4 SECTION 03 10 60
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel for cast -in-place concrete.
B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement,
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete,
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).
B, ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata
2016).
C. ACI SP -66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004,
D. ASTM A82IA82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007,
E. ASTM A6151A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016,
F. WWR-500- Manual of Standard Practice; Structural Welded Wire Reinforcement; Wire
Reinforcement Institute; latest edition.
G. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; latest edition,
H. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; 2011,
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP -66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent
bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A, Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Prepare shop drawings under the supervision of a qualified Structural Engineer (SE) experienced
and licensed in design of work of this type and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A6151A615M, Grade 60 - 60,000 psi,
1. Deformed billet -steel bars.
2. Unfinished,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0320 00-1 SECTION 03 20 00
Copyright 2016 by KL.UBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE REINFORCING
B. Reinforcement Accessories;
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage, 0.0508 inch.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Factory made wire bar supports sized and shaped for
adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement.
3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 1-112 inches of weathering surfaces.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice,
B. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.
1. Review locations of splices with ArchitecUEngineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position. Reinforcing "pull-up" during placement of concrete not acceptable.
S. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
C. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 0140 00, will inspect installed
reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with the appointed firm.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO: l 5-172-1017 03 20 00-2 SECTION 03 20 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONCRETE REINFORCING
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART i GENERAL
1,01 SECTION INCLUDES
A, Concrete footings, foundation walls.
B, Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads.
C. Concrete curing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.
B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.
C. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants for saw cut joints and
isolation joints in slabs.
1,03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010.
B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).
C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012).
D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000.
E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.
F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; 2010.
G. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008),
H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata
2016).
L ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016.
J. ASTM C941C94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2015.
K. ASTM C1501C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016.
L. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.
M. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; 2011.
N. ASTM C4941C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.
0. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for
Use in Concrete; 2015.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 03 30 00 -1 SECTION 03 30 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
P. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015),
Q. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B, Product Data: Submit manufacturers` data on manufactured products showing compliance with
specified requirements and installation instructions.
1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility with
floor covering adhesives.
2. Anchoring epoxy and expansion anchors.
C. Mix Designs: Submit 15 days prior to start of work.
1. Submit for each type of concrete specified.
2, Include back-up test data.
3. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete
Mixtures.
4, Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 - Concrete
Quality, Mixing and Placing.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather,
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 10 00,
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 20 00.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement; ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type.
1, Acquire all cement for entire project from same source.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates; ASTM C 33,
1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C.
D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 033000-2 SECTION 03 30 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2.04 ADMIXTURES
A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0,1 percent by weight of
cement.
B. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type G.
C, High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type F.
D. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type E.
E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type D.
F. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type C.
G. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type B.
H. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C4941C494M Type A.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Anchoring Epoxy: Refer to drawings. Acceptable manufacturer's include
1. Hilti: HIT-RE500-SD injection anchoring system.
2. Simpson Strong -Tie: SET -XP injection anchoring adhesive system.
3, Powers Fasteners: PE 1000+ injection adhesive anchoring system.
2.06 CURING MATERIALS
A. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane -forming
compound; complying with ASTM C309.
B. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations,
B, Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of
field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect/Engineer
for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs,
C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended by manufacturer. Submit to Architect for review and approval.
D. Normal Weight Concrete: Type "D".
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 391C 39M at 28 days: 4,500
psi.
2, Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitiousmaterials by weight.
3. Water -Cement Ratio: Maximum 44 percent by weight.
4, Total Air Content: 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 1731C 173M,
5. Maximum Slump: 4 inches,
6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 314 inch.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 033000-3 SECTION 03 30 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2.08 MIXING
A, Transit Mixers; Comply with ASTM C941C94M,
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.04 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent,
B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of
form accessories.
C. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert
steel dowels and secure in place using approved epoxy.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Notify Architect/Engineer not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations,
C. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test
samples taken.
D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices
will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where
construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing
laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water
jetting.
3.04 SLAB JOINTING
A. Locate joint in center of long direction of the slab/pad.
B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
C. Load Transfer Construction and Contraction Joints: Install load transfer devices as indicated; saw
cut joint at surface as indicated for contraction joints.
D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours
after placing; use 3116 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter
(114) the depth of the slab.
E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
F. Do not interrupt successive placement do not permit cold joints to occur.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 033000-4 SECTION 03 30 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3.05 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES
A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 0140 00, will inspect finished slabs for
conformance to specified tolerances.
B, Screed slabs on grade level, maintaining the following minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor
Levelness values when measured in accordance with ASTM E 1155/ASTM E 1155M.
1. F(F): Specified Overall Value (SOV) of 35; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 24.
2. F(L): Specified Overall Value (SOV) of 25; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 17.
C. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.
D. Measure F(F) and F(L) in accordance with ASTM E1155, within 48 hours after slab installation;
report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section.
E. Correct the slab surface if composite overall value is less than specified and if local value is less
than two-thirds of specified value or less than F(F)13IF(L) 10.
F. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work, Areas requiring
corrective work will be identified. Re -measure corrected areas by the same process.
3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B. Unexposed Form Finish; Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in
height.
C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 114 inch or
more in height. Provide finish as follows:
1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not
more than 24 hours after form removal.
D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows:
1. Provide light broom finish on exterior flat work.
2. Provide 314" radiused edge on exposed slab edges, unless otherwise noted.
3,07 CURING AND PROTECTION
A, Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury,
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 0140
00.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 033000-5 SECTION 03 30 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN -PEACE CONCRETE
3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete; Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements,
B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Engineer, The
cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
Architect/Engineer for each individual area.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured,
3.11 SCHEDULE . CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES
Location
A. Footings
B. Foundation walls and piers
C, Equipment pads; Exterior
top: non -slip
Mix Type
D
D
D
END OF SECTION
Concrete Finish
smooth form
smooth form
sides; smooth form
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 033000-6 SECTION 03 30 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 04 20 00
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hollow Brick,
B. Mortar and Grout.
C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.
D. Flashings.
E. Accessories,
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing; Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.
B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 5301530,11ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and
Related Commentaries, 2013,
B. ASTM A361A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014,
C. ASTM A1531A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009,
D. ASTM A6151A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016,
E. ASTM A6531A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2015.
F. ASTM Al0641A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015.
G. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011.
H. ASTM C1501C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016.
I. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved
2011).
J. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale); 2016,
K. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a,
L. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.
M. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2016.
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 04 20 00 -1 SECTION 04 20 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY
N. ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hallow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale); 2015.
0. ASTM C9791C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010,
P. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2016,
Q. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength ; 2009,
R. BIA Technical Notes No. 7 - Water Penetration Resistance — Design and Detailing; 2005.
S. BIA Technical Notes No, 46 - Maintenance of Brick Masonry; 2005.
T. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry
accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with provisions of ACI 5301530.11ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the
contract documents.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at
least three years of documented experience,
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and
contamination by other materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BRICK UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Glen-Gery Corporation: Regent Bricks; www.glengerrybrick.com.
2. Substitutions: See section 0160 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Hollow Facing and Building Brick: ASTM C652, Grade SW; Type HBS; Class H40V.
1. Color and texture: to match existing building.
2. Nominal size: 7-518" thick x 3-518" high x 11-518" long.
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C1501C150M, Type 1.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 042000-2 SECTION 04 20 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
C. Mortar Aggregate, ASTM C144.
D. Grout Aggregate; ASTM C404,
E. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing
into mortar and complying with ASTM C9791C979M,
1. Color(s): to match existing.
F. Water: Clean and potable.
G. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather,
H. Moisture -Resistant Admixture; Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Manufacturers;
1. Blok-Lok Limited; www.blok-lok.com.
2, Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; www.h-b.com/sle.
3. WIRE -BOND; www.wirebond.com,
4, Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Reinforcing Steel, ASTM A615(A615M, Grade 40 (40,000 psi), deformed billet bars; galvanized.
C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; ASTM A10641A1064M steel wire, hot dip
galvanized after fabrication to ASTM Al 531A153M, Class B; 0,1483 inch side rods with 0.1483
inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 112 inch of
mortar coverage on each exposure.
2.04 FLASHINGS
A. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self -adhering polymer modified asphalt sheet; 40 mils (0.040 inch)
minimum total thickness; with cross laminated polyethylene top and bottom surfaces.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advanced Building Products, Inc., Strip -N -Flash: www.advancedbuildingproducts.com/sle,
b. York Manufacturing, Inc; York Seal: www.yorkmfg.com.
c. Substitutions See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements,
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints,
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Product: # RS Series: www.h-b.com/sle.
b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Joint Filler: Closed cell neoprene; oversized 50 percent to joint width; selfexpanding; 4 inch wide
by maximum lengths available.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Product: # NS -TA: www.h-b.comisle,
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 042000-3 SECTION 04 20 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY
C. Drip Edge: Stainless steel; compatible with membrane and adhesives.
D. Weeps;
1. Type: Single Wythe Masonry Type.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Mortar Net Solutions; BlockPlash: www.mortaTnet.com.
b, Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements.
E. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification,
1. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.
B, Colored Mortar; Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect/Engineer's
sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment -to -cement ratio.
C. Grout: ASTM C476; consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine
grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces
with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.
D. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturers recommended rate and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
E. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A, Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 5301530.11ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more
stringent.
3.04 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C. Brick Units:
1. Bond: Running,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 042000-4 SECTION 04 20 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY
2. Coursing: Two units and two mortar joints to equal 8 inches.
3. Mortar Joints; Concave.
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
D. Interlock intersections and external corners.
E, Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be
made, remove mortar and replace.
F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges, Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges,
3,06 WEEPSICAVITY VENTS
A, Install weeps in single wythe walls at 8 inches on center horizontally above through -wall flashing
and at bottom of walls.
3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint
reinforcement 16 inches on center.
B. Place masonryjoint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings.
Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening,
C, Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D, Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches on center.
B, Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings.
Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening,
C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted,
B. Extend metal flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. Install joint
sealer below drip edge to prevent moisture migration under flashing,
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 042000-5 SECTION 04 20 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY
3.10 GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement, Maintain position within 112 inch of
dimensioned position.
C, Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not shown, 314 inch wide and deep.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit; 1116 inch.
B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 114 inch in 10 ft and 112 inch in 20 ft or more.
C, Maximum Variation from Plumb: 114 inch per story non -cumulative; 112 inch in two stories or more.
D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 118 inch in 3 ft and 114 inch in 10 ft; 112 inch in 30 ft.
E, Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 114 inch, plus 318 inch,
F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 114 inch.
3.13 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings,
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C, Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution,
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.14 PROTECTION
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are
subject to damage by construction activities,
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 042000-6 SECTION 04 20 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved UNIT MASONRY
SECTION 04 72 00
CAST STONE MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Architectural cast stone.
B. Units required are;
1, Exterior wall units, including wall caps and coping.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry; Installation of cast stone in conjunction with masonry.
B. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants; Sealing joints indicated to be left open for sealant.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata
2016),
B. ASTM A6151A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
C. ASTM A7671A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement; 2009 (Reapproved 2015).
D, ASTM A8841A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement; 2014.
E. ASTM Al0641A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015,
F. ASTM C331C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016.
G. ASTM C1501C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016.
H. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a,
I. ASTM C4941C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013.
J. ASTM C1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; 2016.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data; Test results of cast stone components made previously by the manufacturer,
1, Include one copy of ASTM C1364 for Architect/Engineer's use.
C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, dimensions, layouts, profiles, cross sections, reinforcement,
exposed faces, arrangement of joints, anchoring methods, anchors, and piece numbers.
D. Verification Samples; Pieces of actual cast stone components not less than 6 inches square,
illustrating range of color and texture to be anticipated in components furnished for the project.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 04 72 00 -1 SECTION 04 72 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST STONE MASONRY
E. Manufacturer's Qualification Data; Documentation showing compliance with specified
requirements.
9.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A, Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. A firm with a minimum of 5 years experience producing cast stone of types required for project,
2. Current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute or the Architectural Precast Association.
3. Manufacturer's production facility currently holds a Plant Certification from the Cast Stone
Institute or the Architectural Precast Association,
4. Adequate plant capacity to furnish quality, sizes, and quantity of cast stone required without
delaying progress of the work.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver cast stone components secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and
discoloration. Protect corners from damage.
B. Number each piece individually to match shop drawings and schedule.
C. Store cast stone components and installation materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Store cast stone components on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under
covers to prevent condensation. Prevent contact with dirt,
E. Protect cast stone components during handling and installation to prevent chipping, cracking, or
other damage.
F. Store mortar materials where contamination can be avoided.
G. Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone components with unit masonry
work to optimize on-site inventory and to avoid delaying the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE
A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural
limestone, complying with ASTM C1364.
1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C1364; calculate strength of pieces to be field
out at 80 percent of uncut piece.
2. Freeze -Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by laboratory testing in accordance with ASTM
C1364.
3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface blemishes
visible from distance of 20 feet.
4. Color; Match existing.
5. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment.
B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings,
1. Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of plus/minus 118
inch or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 114 inch.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0472 00-2 SECTION 04 72 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST STONE MASONRY
2. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide;
a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces.
b. Drips on projecting components, wherever possible.
c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in.
C. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses;
comply with ACI 318.
1. Pieces More than 24 inches in Any Dimension: Provide full length two-way reinforcement of
cross-sectional area not less than 0.25 percent of unit cross-sectional area.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C1501C150M.
1. For Mortar: Type I or 11, except Type III may be used in cold weather.
B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C331C33M, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone.
C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C331C33M, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands.
D. Admixtures: ASTM C4941C494M.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A6151A615M deformed bars, galvanized.
1. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A7671A767M, Class I,
G. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A10641A1064M, galvanized or ASTM A8841A884M,
epoxy coated.
H. Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required
for conditions.
1. Mortar: Portland cement -lime, as specified in Section 04 05 11; do not use masonry cement.
J. Cleaner; General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence,
and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging
masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner
manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine construction to receive cast stone components. Notify Architect/Engineer if construction
is not acceptable.
B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of Section
04 20 00.
B. Mechanically anchor cast stone units indicated; set remainder in mortar.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 04 7200-3 SECTION 04 72 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CAST STONE MASONRY
C. Setting:
1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation.
2, Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fill vertical joints with mortar.
4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non -shrink grout.
D. Joints: Make all joints 318 inch, except as otherwise detailed.
1. Rake mortar joints 314 inch for sealant placement at all field joints.
2. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints.
3. Point joints with mortar in layers 318 inch thick and tool to a slight concave profile.
4. Leave the following joints open for sealant:
a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps.
b. Joints in projecting units.
c. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers.
d. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads.
e. Joints below ledge and relieving angles.
f. Joints labeled "expansion joint".
E. Installation Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: Not more than 118 inch in 10 feet or 114 inch in 20 feet or more.
2. Variation from Level: Not more than 118 inch in 10 feet or 114 inch in 20 feet, or 318 inch
maximum.
3. Variation in Joint Width: Not more than 118 inch in 36 inches or 114 of nominal joint width,
whichever is less.
4. Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Not more than 1116 inch difference
between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units.
F. Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20
feet.
1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Repair methods and results subject to Architect/Engineer's approval.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean completed exposed cast stone after mortar is thoroughly set and cured.
1. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaner.
2. Apply cleaner to cast stone in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
4. Do not use acidic cleaners.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect completed work from damage.
B. Clean, repair, or restore damaged or mortar -splashed work to condition of new work.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 047200-4 SECTION 04 72 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.: All Rights Reserved CAST STONE MASONRY
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM 01193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data for Sealants: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for each product to be
used, that includes the following.
1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and
color availability.
2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product.
3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible.
4. Substrates the product should not be used on.
5. Substrates for which use of primer is required.
C. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color cards
showing standard colors available for selection.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at
least three years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS
A. Scope:
1, Exterior Joints: Seal open joints, whether or not the joint is indicated on the drawings, unless
specifically indicated not to be sealed. Exterior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to,
the following items.
a. Wall expansion and control joints.
b. Cast stone coping joints.
c. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction,
d. Joints between different exposed materials.
e. Openings below ledge angles in masonry.
f. 'her joints indicated below.
�r
2. Do not seal the following types of joints.
a, Intentional weepholes in masonry.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0792 00- 1 SECTION 07 92 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved JOINT SEALANTS
b. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other type of
sealing device,
c. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed,
d. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section,
e. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work.
B, Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants,
3.02 PREPARATION
A, Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant
work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable,
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces
and material installation instructions,
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1.
2, Neck dimension no greater than 113 of the joint width.
3, Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width.
D, Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used,
E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting
sealant on adjacent surfaces.
F. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended
temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless
manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed.
G. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape
immediately after tooling sealant surface,
H. Cast Stone Copings; Install sealant joints at all raked mortar/field joints in cast stone copings.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0792 00-2 SECTION 07 92 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 09 91 13
EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope; Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory -finished and unless otherwise
indicated, including the following:
1. Mechanical and Electrical:
a. At the outdoors, paint equipment, gas piping and conduit that is exposed to weather or to
view, including factory -finished materials.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items factory -finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory -applied
primers are not considered factory finished,
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment,
5. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment; Painted identification.
B. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for MVAC Piping and Equipment: Painted identification.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section,
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2014.
B. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; current edition,
www,paintinfo.com.
C. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015.
D. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
E. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2007.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each:
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0991 13-1 SECTION 09 9113
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXTERIOR PAINTING
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g.
"alkyd enamel").
2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47),
3, Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of
each system.
4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-112 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range
of colors available for each finishing product specified.
1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.
2, Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Arch itecUEngineer before preparing
samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with
minimum three years documented experience,
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with
minimum 5 years experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A, Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer,
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES • GENERAL
A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field -catalyzed paint,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0991 13-2 SECTION 09 91 13
Copyright 2016 by KLIBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXTERIOR PAINTING
1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of
drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single
production run.
3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A. Paint E -OP - Exterior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including ferrous metal.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Exterior Alkyd Enamel; MPI #94.
2.04 PRIMERS
A, Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of
top coats.
1. Anti -Corrosive Alkyd Primer for Metal; MPI #79.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler,
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler,
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially effect proper application.
C. Test shop -applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances,"including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing,
D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra -sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 0991 13- 3 SECTION 09 91 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved EXTERIOR PAINTING
F. Galvanized Surfaces;
1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2.
G. Ferrous Metal;
1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1,
Z Shop -Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to
make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel
surfaces. Re -prime entire shop -primed item.
3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast
Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance,
E. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Calors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply additional
coats until complete hide is achieved.
F, Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to
applying next coat.
G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site,
3.05 PROTECTION
A, Protect finishes until completion of Project.
B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.
3.06 COLOR SCHEDULE
A. Match adjacent exterior surfaces color,
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 099113-4 SECTION 09 91 13
Copyright 2016 by KWBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved EXTERIOR PAINTING
SECTION 2311 23
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for natural gas piping systems.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting,
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3 - Gas Appliance Pressure Regulators; 2007 (Reaffirmed 2012),
B. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing
Qualifications; 2015.
C. ASME 816.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 150 and 300; 2011.
D. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; 2014.
E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014.
F. ASTM A531A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012,
G. ASTM A2341A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy
Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2015.
H. MSS SP -78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; 2011.
I. MSS SP -110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;
2010,
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor
regulations.
D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX,
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves,
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of
the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2311 23 -1 SECTION 23 1123
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A531A53M, Schedule 40 black.
1. Fittings: ASMI= B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A2341A234M, wrought steel welding type.
2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASMI= 831.1.
2.02 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.
B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:
1. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed
neoprene gaskets.
2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP -58,
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type
using MSS SP -58 recommendations.
2.04 BALL VALVES
A. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP -110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze or ductile iron
body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof
stem, lever handle, threaded ends with union.
2.05 PLUG VALVES
A. Construction 2-112 Inches and Larger: MSS SP -78, 175 psi CWP, cast iron body and plug,
pressure lubricated, Teflon or Buna N packing, flanged or threaded ends. Provide lever operator
with set screw.
2.06 LINE PRESSURE REGULATORS AND APPLIANCE REGULATORS INDICATORS
A, Compliance Requirements:
1. Appliance Regulator: ANSI Z21.181CSA 6.3.
B. Materials in Contact With Gas:
1. Housing: Aluminum, steel (free of non-ferrous metals),
2. Seals and Diaphragms: NBR-based rubber.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C, Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 231123-2 SECTION 23 1123
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.: All Rights Reserved FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
C. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
D. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
E Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Metal Piping:
a. Pipe Size: 112 inches to 1-114 inches:
aj Maximum Hanger Spacing; 6.5 ft,
bj Hanger Rod Diameter: 318 inches,
b. Pipe Size: 1-112 inches to 2 inches:
a) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft.
b} Hanger Rod Diameter: 318 inch.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 23 1123-3 SECTION 23 11 23
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
SECTION 26 05 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to Division
01 - General Requirements,
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all materials and labor in conformance with the following codes and standards:
1. Village of Oak Brook - Code of Ordinances.
2. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 2008 Edition as adopted and Amended by the Village
of Oak Brook, Illinois.
3. IBC International Building Code, 2009 Edition, with local amendments.
4. IECC International Energy Conservation Code, 2006 Edition with local amendments,
5. International Fire Code, First Edition, 2003, with local amendments.
6. ADA -AG - American with Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines.
7. Illinois Accessibility Code, 1997 Edition (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 71, Chapter I,
Subchapter b, Part 400).
8. Underwriter's Laboratory.
9. Install electrical Work in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store and protect all materials as specified under the provisions of Section 0160 00 and as
specified herein.
B. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,
compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.
C. Ship products to the job site in their original packaging, Receive and store products in a suitable
manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Keep equipment upright at all times.
D. Investigate the spaces through which equipment must pass to reach its final destination.
Coordinate with the manufacturer to arrange delivery at the proper stage of construction and to
provide shipping splits where necessary.
1.05 PROJECTISITE CONDITIONS
A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Drawings
have omitted certain branch circuitry in areas for ease of reading. All branch circuitry is to be
provided by Contractor.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 05 DO- 1 SECTION 26 05 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including
changes to Work specified in other Sections, Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before
proceeding as specified under modification procedures,
1.06 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
A. Procedures for modification of Work are specified under the provisions of Section 01 20 00.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide Work as required for a complete and operational electrical installation.
B. All products shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with industry standards.
Standards, organizations, and their abbreviations as used hereafter, include the following:
1. American National Standards Institute, Inc (ANSI).
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
C. Install all Work in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit all requested items in Division 26,27 & 28 Sections under provisions of Section 0160 00,
1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions will be considered only as allowed within the provisions of Section 0160 00.
1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Cooperate and assist in the preparation of project record documents under the provisions of
Section 0170 00.
1.11 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
A. Construct Work in sequence with all other trades and Owner's schedule as specified under the
provisions of Section 0170 00.
B, Prepare Work as specified under the provisions of Section 01 70 00,
C. Provide cleaning as specified under provisions of Section 0170 00.
1.12 TRENCHING, FILL AND COMPACTION
A. Provide trenching, fill and compaction for all work indicated on Drawings and specified in Division
26 sections. Perform work in accordance with Division 31 requirements.
1.13 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Arrange with utility company and provide temporary lighting and power necessary for building
construction and temporary structures. Perform work in accordance with Section 01 50 00
requirements,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 00- 2 SECTION 26 05 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.14 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
A. Proper project management and coordination is critical for a successful project. Manage and
coordinate the Work with all other trades in accordance with Section 0130 00 requirements.
Reliance on the Drawings and Specifications only for exact project requirements is insufficient for
proper coordination.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260500-3 SECTION 26 05 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 26 05 01
MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical demolition.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 0170 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements; Additional requirements for alterations
work.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes,
1. Electrical demolition: Remove electrical systems shown on drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A, Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3,01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities,
B. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions
C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and are intended to identify the limits
of the construction site. Remove all electrical systems in their entirety in proper sequence with the
Work,
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.
B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel
experienced in such operations.
C. Existing Electrical Service and Emergency Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service
until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and
connections. Obtain permission from Owner and Architect at least 24 hours before partially or
completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration, . Make temporary connections to maintain
service in areas adjacent to work area,
D. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make
switchovers and connections, Notify Owner, Architect/Engineer and local fire service at least 24
hours before partially or completely disabling system, Minimize outage duration. Make temporary
connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 05 01-1 SECTION 26 05 01
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit
servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are
not removed.
E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
F. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active, Modify installation or provide
access panel as appropriate.
G. Relocate existing fire alarm devices affected by wall, ceiling and floor demolition.
H. Properly dispose of all ballast to approved ballast recycler. Do not land fill ballasts,
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 05 01 -2 SECTION 26 05 01
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
SECTION 26 05 02
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes;
1, Nameplates and labels.
2. Wire and cable markers.
3. Conduit markers.
4, Underground Warning Tape,
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSIINFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70
B. Products; Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as a suitable for purpose
specified as shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.
B. Locations;
1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
C. Letter Size:
1. Use 118 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads,
2. Use 114 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3116 inch white letters on a black background. Use only for
identification of individual wall switches and receptacles and control device stations.
2.02 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers:
1, Brady Model PCPS,
2. Panduit Model PCM.
3. T & B Model WM.
B. Description: Cloth type wire markers.
C. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and each load connection.
D. Legend:
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 02-1 SECTION 26 05 02
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
2.03 CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet.
B. Spacing, 20 feet on center.
C. Color;
1. 480 Volt System: Orange
2. 208 Volt System: Black
3. Fire Alarm System: Red.
2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored red with suitable warning legend
describing buried electrical lines.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels,
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines,
B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws.
C, Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3
inches below finished grade.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 2605 02-2 SECTION 26 05 02
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 26 0519
CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1, Wiring Methods.
2. Wire and Cable
3, Wiring Devices and Wall Plates
4, Large Poke -Through Fittings
5. Pushbuttons,
6. Motion Sensors.
7. Wiring Connections.
& Cords and Caps.
9. Retractable Cord and Plug Set.
10.Ceiling Fans,
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Under Provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Submittals:
1, Product Data; Provide data on wiring devices and cover plates.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation,
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as a suitable for purpose
specified as shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING METHODS
A. All locations: Building wire in raceway.
B. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for
control wiring,
1. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 100 feet.
Use minimum #10 AWG conductor wire in all the following locations:
a. All programmable panel branch circuits (larger where indicated).
b. All emergency lighting and exit branch circuits.
2.02 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Manufacturers;
1. Okonite,
2. Southwire.
3, Collyer,
B. Building Wire:
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 19 - 1 SECTION 26 05 19
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES
I . Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than 6 AWG; Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt
insulation.
2. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, 6
and 8 AWG, stranded conductor; smaller than 8 AWG, stranded conductor (solid for device
terminations).
3. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation.
4. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
5. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.
6. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
7. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
C. Locations:
1, Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in
raceway.
2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in raceway.
3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire with Type THHN insulation in raceway,
4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THWN insulation in raceway.
5. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type XHHW insulation in raceway.
6. Underground Installations: Use only building wire with Type XHHW insulation in raceway.
2.03 WIRING DEVICES AND WALL PLATES
A. Single Pole Switch: Specification grade.
1. Hubbell Model 1121,
2. P & S Model 521,
3. Leviton Model 1121,
4. Color: Ivory.
B. Three-way Switch: Specification grade.
1. Hubbell Model 1123.
2. P & S Model 523.
3. Leviton Model 1123.
4. Color: Ivory,
C. Four-way Switch: Specification grade.
1. Hubbell Model 1124.
2. P & S Model 524,
3. Leviton Model 1124.
4. Color: Ivory.
D. Single -pole Key Switch: Specification grade,
1, Hubbell Model 1121-L.
2. P & S Model 521-L.
3. Leviton Model 1121-L.
E. Three-way Key Switch: Specification grade,
1. Hubbell Model 1123-L.
2, P & S Model 523-L.
3, Leviton Model 1123-L.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260519-2 SECTION 26 05 19
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.: All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES
F, Four-way Key Switch: Specification grade.
1. Hubbell Model 1124-L.
2. P & S Model 524-L.
3, Leviton Model 1124-L,
G. Single -pole Fluorescent Dimmer Switch: Specification grade.
1, Lutron Nova Series or equal,
2, Description: Linear slide fluorescent dimmer, compatible with ballast and number of lamps,
3, Voltage, 277 volt.
4. Power Rating: Match load shown on drawings.
H. Momentary Contact (Keyed) Switch
1, Hubbell,
2, P & S.
3, Leviton Model 1257-L,
4. Color: Ivory,
I. Momentary Contact Switch
1, Hubbell.
2, P&S,
3. Leviton Model 1257.
4. Color: Ivory,
J, Duplex Convenience Receptacle: Nema 5-20R, duplex, specification grade,
1. Hubbell,
2, Bryant,
3, Leviton.
4, Color Ivory,
K. Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacle: Nema 5-20R, duplex, isolated ground, specification grade,
1. Hubbell Model IG -5362,
Z P & S Model 1G6300.
3, Leviton Model 5262 -IG,
4, Color: Orange with delta icon,
L. GFCI Receptacle. Nema 5-20R, duplex, GFCI, specification grade.
1, Hubbell Model GF -5362,
2, Slater Model SIR -20-F,
3, Eagle Model 647,
4. Color: Ivory.
M. Decorative Cover Plate:
1, Hubbell,
2, Bryant.
3, Leviton.
4, Description: Ivory, metal,
N. Weatherproof die cast cover,
1. Intermatic Model WP1030MC (Two -Gang),
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 19-3 SECTION 26 05 19
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.: All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES
2. Approved Equal.
0. Special Purpose Receptacles:
1, Hubbell,
2. P&S.
3. Leviton.
4. Description; Nema configuration as shown on Drawings unless noted otherwise.
P. Sink Top "Air" Switch
1. Description: Air activated, counter top mounted button with air tube and dual -outlet control box
(mounted below cabinet).
2. Manufacturer:
a. In-sink-erator "sink top switch" type.
b. Approved equal.
3. Button finish:
a. To be selected by architect.
2.04 MOTION SENSORS
A, Manufacturers:
1. Leviton
2. Hubbell
3. Approved Equal
B. Combination Wall Switch/Occupancy Sensor
1. Dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic), 277V sensor with 180degree field-of-view
and maximum coverage of 2400 square feet.
2. Manual push button for ON/OFF light switching.
3. Time delay settings; 30 seconds, 10, 20 or 30 minutes).
4. Adjustable integral blinders.
5. Sensor shall continuously monitor space to identify usage patterns, Unit shall automatically
adjust time delay and sensitivity settings for optimal performance and energy efficiency,
C. Ceiling Mounted,
1. Dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic), 24VDC sensor with unobtrusive appearance
and 360 degrees of coverage.
a. Provide type/quantity of motion sensors to meet square foot coverage requirements.
2. Provide power pack for 24VDC controls and switching of 120/277V circuits, Minimum quantity
of sensors per power pack; 2,
3, Sensor shall continuously monitor space to identify usage patterns. Unit shall automatically
adjust time delay and sensitivity settings for optimal performance and energy efficiency.
4. Time delay settings: Auto, fixed (5,10,15,20 or 30 minutes).
5. Sensitivity settings: Auto, reduced sensitivity (passive infrared) variable (ultrasonic).
6. (1) N/O and (1) NIC output.
2.05 PUSHBUTTONS
A. Manufacturers:
1, General Electric C-2000 Series or equal.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 05 19-4 SECTION 26 05 19
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES
B. Description, NEMA ICS -2, 600 volt ac maximum, 10 amperes ac continuous.
1, Emergency Electric Shut Off: Two position maintained push-pull 40mm, round plastic red color
in NEMA 1 enclosure.
a. Cover Plate; Emergency Stop cover plate, brushed chrome.
b. Label: Gas Shut Off.
c. Contacts: One normally closed contact, one normally open contact.
2. Laboratory General Exhaust Switch: Multi -function on-off NEMA 1 enclosure, gang with
emergency electric shut off pushbutton.
a. Cover Plate: Room Exhaust cover plate.
b. Label: On/Off.
2.06 LARGE POKE -THROUGH PITTINGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Wiremold Evolution 6AT Series.
2. Approved Equal.
B. Description; Recessed mounted Poke-thru with devices as noted on drawings. Provide top guard
protection. Poke thru's shall be fire rated.
1. Provide fire stopping as required.
2. Core holes in floor as required. Poke-thru's shall be spaced to maintain structural integrity of
the floor,
2.07 WIRING CONNECTIONS:
A. Make permanent splice connections to achieve no measurable temperature rise:
1. Wire size up to #6 AWG: Spring wire cap.
2. Over #6 AWG: Crimp type Compression connector. Rubber under wrap with insulated plastic
tape over wrap.
B. Make terminations to achieve no measurable temperature rise:
1. Wire size up to #6 AWG: Set screw type compression terminal lug.
2. Wire size over #6 AWG: Crimp type compression connector to spade lug.
2.08 CORDS AND CAPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carol.
2, Substitutions: Or Equal.
B. Attachment Plug Construction; Conform to NEMA WD 1.
C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.
D. Cord Construction: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified
equipment grounding conductor.
E. Cord Construction: ASTM B-8 or B-174, annealed stranded bare copper with PVC insulation and
jacket. Resistant to oils, lubricants, water, acids alkalies, ozone or abrasion.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2606 19-5 SECTION 26 0519
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES
F. Size; Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit
overcurrent protection (3 conductor#12 unless otherwise noted.)
G, Accessories: Strain -relief at cap and junction box.
H. Accessories: Provide cord grip next to ceiling junction box to support cord, Mount cord grip to
structure.
2.09 RETRACTABLE CORD AND PLUG SET
A, Manufacturers:
1. Appleton,
2. Woodhead.
B. Description: Steel spring driven, self -retracting cord and plug set.
1. Cord: Thirty-five (35') foot #12/3 SO Cord.
2. Plug: Nema 5-20R, with strain relief.
3. Support; Fixed, structural support.
4. Accessories: Adjustable retrieval ball stop, intermediate cord hanger,
2.10 CEILING FANS
A. Manufacturer:
1, 0 -MARK,
a. #5630-1 RDP.
2. Substitution: Or Approved Equal.
B. Description:
1. Heavy-Duty/High Performance Industrial 56° reversible variable speed ceiling fan.
C. Motor: Fractional horsepower, direct drive, 18 -pole permanent split capacitor motor with
permanently lubricated ball bearings and built-in thermal overload protection.
D. Speed Control: Multi -fan solid state speed controller,
1. 0 -Mark #12006 or equal.
E. Reverse Switch:
1. D.P.D.T. switch.
2. See wiring diagram on details sheet.
F. Finish: White epoxy enamel,
G. Mounting: Surface, roof truss.
H. Voltage: 120 volt.
1, Accessory: Fan Guard (Marley #2800-1 or 2800-2), Secondary support chain.
2.11 CEILING FANS
A. Manufacturer:
1. 0 -MARK
a. #36201
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 19-6 SECTION 26 05 19
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES
2, Substitution: Or Approved Equal,
B. Description:
1. Heavy-Duty/High Performance Industrial 36" reversible variable speed ceiling fan.
C. Motor: Fractional horsepower, direct drive, 18 -pole permanent split capacitor motor with
permanently lubricated ball bearings and built-in thermal overload protection.
D. Speed Control: Multi -fan solid state speed controller.
1, Q -Mark #12006 or equal.
E. Reverse Switch:
1. D.P.D.T, switch.
2. See wiring diagram on details sheet.
F. Finish: White epoxy enamel.
G. Mounting: Surface, roof truss.
H. Voltage: 120 volt.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verity that interior of building is physically protected from weather,
B. Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed,
C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Neatly train and secure wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards,
B. Use wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires.
C. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing
and lengths required.
D. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time,
E. Protect exposed cable from damage.
F. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards.
G, Support cables above accessible ceilings to keep them from resting on ceiling tiles,
H, Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible
temperature rise,
I. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape
uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of
conductor,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 19-7 SECTION 26 05 19
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES
J. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
K. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
L. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install wall switches at height shown on drawings, OFF position down.
2. Install convenience receptacles at height shown on drawings grounding pole on bottom.
3. Install specific purpose receptacles at heights shown on Drawings.
M. Install wall plates flush and level.
1. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
2. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above
accessible ceilings, and on surface -mounted outlets.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 0519-8 SECTION 26 0519
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUCTORS AND DEVICES
SECTION 26 05 29
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Conduit and equipment supports.
2, Anchors and fasteners,
1,02 REFERENCES
A. NECA - National Contractors Association,
B, ANSIINFPA 70 - National Electrical Code,
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance,
B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of
equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products,
C. Anchors and Fasteners;
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors.
2, Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps,
3, Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4, Hallow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts,
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts,
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
7. Wood Elements Use wood screws,
2.02 RACK CONSTRUCTION
A. Manufacturers:
1, UniStrut.
2, B -Line.
3, Caddy,
B. Description:
1. Rack: 12 gauge galvanized steel, 15/8" BY 15/8" full, green finish.
2. Spring Steel Clips: Spring or twirl type.
3, Pipe Clamp: Conduit clamp, match with rack.
4. Threaded rod and hardware: Plated finish, size and length as required for loading and
conditions,
2.03 CONDUIT HANGERS
A. Manufacturers
1. Minerrallac Electric Company,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 29-1 SECTION 26 05 29
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved SUPPORTING DEVICES
2. Substitutions Or Approved Equal.
B. Description;
1, Standard conduit hanger, zinc -plated steel with bolts.
2. Threaded rod and hardware, Plated finish, size and length as required for loading and
conditions.
2.04 BEAM CLAMPS
A. Manufacturers;
1, Appleton,
2. Midwest.
3, Raco,
B. Description: Malleable beam clamp, zinc plated steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A, Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B, Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D. Do not use powder -actuated anchors.
E. Do not drill or cut structural members.
F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon
head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock
washers under all nuts.
G. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch
off wall,
1. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in
hollow partitions.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260529-2 SECTION 26 05 29
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SUPPORTING DEVICES
SECTION 26 05 35
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1,01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Raceway Requirements,
2. Metallic Conduit and Fittings.
1 Nonmetallic Tubing.
4. Electrical Boxes,
5. Directional Boring.
6. Pedestal Enclosure.
7, Electrical Floor Boxes,
8. Multi -Service Steel Recessed Floor Box
9, Electrical Ceiling Boxes,
10. Penetration Sealants.
11. Surface Metallic Raceway.
12. Low Profile Surface Metallic Raceway.
13.Surface Nonmetallic Raceway.
14,Pop-Open Enclosure,
15.Hand Holes.
16, Wireway,
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI C80,1 - Specification for Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc -Coated,
2. ANSI C80,3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc -Coated.
B. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
C. NECA "Standard of Installation"
D. Underwriter's Laboratory Fire Resistance Directory.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Install all raceways in accordance with applicable building codes and NECA "Standard of
Installation."
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit intended routing of all conduits exposed in rooms or under slab, Due to
the exposed nature of this Work, careful lay -out procedures are necessary to provide an
acceptable aesthetic appearance and to avoid crossing of conduits.
B. Submit Under Provisions of Section 0178 00 - Contract Closeout:
1. Project Record Documents:
a. Accurately record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 05 35 -1 SECTION 26 05 35
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES
b, Accurately record re -arrangement of panel schedule at panelboards.
c. Accurately record within a tolerance of 6 inches the location of all conduits greater than 314"
trade size, all conduit homeruns, all underground and all in -slab conduits.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. ,Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as
required to complete wiring system.
D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at
locations required for box to serve intended purpose. Include in base bid, installation within 10
feet of location shown,
1.06 TRENCHING, FILL AND COMPACTION
A. Provide trenching, fill and compaction for all worm indicated on Drawings and specified in Division
26 sections,
B. Delegated Engineering Responsibility: The Contractor shall employ experienced horizontal
directional drilling personnel familiar with local conditions and City of St. Charles Electrical
Department requirements, Contractor shall be responsible for selection of drilling equipment,
drilling fluids, drilling operations, location and tacking instrumentation, ream and pull back
procedures.
1.07 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Arrange with utility company and provide temporary lighting and power necessary for building
continued operations and construction use.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2,01 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS
A. Use only specified raceway in the following locations:
1, Branch Circuits and Feeders;
a. Concealed Dry Interior Locations Electrical metallic tubing,
b. Exposed Dry Interior Finished Locations. Electrical metallic tubing,
c. Exposed Dry Interior Unfinished Locations: Electrical metallic tubing,
d, Utility Primary and Site Lighting: Sch 40 PVC, concrete encased under road ways and
parking lots.
a) Transition to galvanized rigid metallic conduit at transformer pad and utility pole
locations.
b) Conduit Fittings; NEMA TC 9
c) Product: As approved by Utility Company (Commonwealth Edison Company).
e. All other locations: Galvanized Rigid Metallic Conduit.
B. Size raceways for conductor type installed.
1. Minimum Size Conduit Homerun to Panelboard: 314 -inch,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2605 35-2 SECTION 26 05 35
Copyright 2016 by KLLIBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES
2.02' METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit:
1. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1,
2. Electrical metallic tubing: ANSI C80.3.
3. Flexible Conduit: UL 1, zinc -coated steel.
a. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: UL360, Fittings shall be specifically approved for use with this
raceway,
B. Conduit Fittings;
1, Metal Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1,
a. EMT fittings: Use set -screw indentor-type fittings.
2.03 NONMETALLIC TUBING
A. Manufacturers:
1, Carlon Co.
2. LCP National Plastics, Inc.
3. Pacific Western Extruded Plastics Co.
B. Description: UL651A "Type EB and A PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit."
1, Conduit: Schedule 40. Suitable for exposure to sunlight and direct burial.
2.04 ELECTRICAL BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Raco.
2. Steel City.
3. Appleton.
4. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal,
B, Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel, suitable for installation in
masonry:
C. Equipment Support Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 2 inch male fixture
studs where required.
D. Wet Location Outlet Boxes: Cast aluminum: Cast alloy, deep type, gasket cover, threaded hubs.
2.05 POP -OPEN ENCLOSURE
A. Manufacturers:
1, FSR
2, Hubbell
3. Wiremold
B. Description
1, Recessed table top enclosure with pop -open cover,
2. (1) Double duplex receptacle.
3. Up to 8 Communications devices.
4. Can be installed in any table surface with thickness ranging from .75" to 2.75'
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 260535-3 SECTION 26 05 35
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES
C. Cover;
1, Flush type.
2. Color as selected by Architect.
2.06 PEDESTAL ENCLOSURE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell,
2. Wiremold,
3, Approved Equal.
B. Description:
1. Above Counter service pedestal,
2. Metallic with aluminum frame and brushed aluminum housing,
3. Up to either (2) duplex receptacles (one on each side of pedestal), (2) GFCI duplex receptacles
(one on each side of pedestal) or (8) communications devices (four on each side of pedestal),
4. Bottom of enclosure shall be mounted to counter (stem mounting not acceptable).
C. Cover:
1. Stainless steel.
2.07 ELECTRICAL FLOOR BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
1, Hubbell.
2. Appleton.
3, Walker,
B. Concrete floor slab: Fully adjustable, stamped steel, 3" deep, two compartment (power/data),
recessed flip top cover service box style floor box.
C. Provide surface mounted ("dog house" type) service fittings where called out on drawings,
1. Service fitting shall:
a. accept up to (2) 1" locking nipples.
b. have interchangeable faceplates.
D. Cafeteria: Fully adjustable, cast iron, 4" deep, brass screw covers with threaded brass protective
rings for plugs (mechanical/wet mop protection).
2.08 MULTI -SERVICE STEEL RECESSED FLOOR BOXES
A. Manufacturers
1. Hubbell Wiring Devices - Kellems - www.hubbell-wiring.com
2. Thomas & Betts Corporation - www.tnb.com
3. The Wiremold Company - www.wiremold.com
B. Description:
1. Recessed type,
2. Provide capacity of up to six duplex receptacles and/or communication services.
3. Fully adjustable before concrete pour.
4. Openings for up to (4) 1" conduits and (4) 314" conduits.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 260535-4 SECTION 26 05 35
Copyright 2016 by KLIBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES
C. Flush Cover and Flange Assembly:
1. Steel Cover with Carpet Flange Assembly.
2. Cover shall provide protection from water, dirt and debris.
3. Cover shall close completely when plugs are connected into receptacles and/or
communications jacks,
D. Backbox dimensions (minimum).
1. 10" Length x 10" Width x 3" Depth.
2.09 ELECTRICAL CEILING BOXES.
A. Manufacturers;
1, Panduit.
2. Leviton,
3. Walker,
B. Description: Two gang, separated power/data surface metallic box. Combination duplex
receptacle with two port data faceplate, compatible with data jacks. Ivory.
2.10 PENETRATION SEALANTS
A. Fire -rated assemblies; Provide firestopping of all penetrations made by Work under this Contract in
accordance with provisions of Section 07 84 00 requirements.
B. Thermal and Moisture Protection: Provide thermal and moisture protection made by Work under
this Contract of all exterior wall, floor and roof penetrations in accordance with Division 7
requirements.
2.11 TWO CELL SURFACE METALLIC RACEWAY
A. Manufacturer;
1. Wiremold G-4000 Series or equal,
B. Description: UL -5, 4-3/4 inches wide by 1-3/4 inches height, two channel galvanized steel,
combination power/data,
C. Finish; Painted, ANSI 61 Gray.
D. Accessories; Transition fittings, divider plates, device mounting straps, couplings, combination
power/data cover plates, end plates and all other accessories necessary for a complete system in
locations indicated on Drawings.
2.12 TWO CELL LOW PROFILE SURFACE METALLIC RACEWAY
A. Manufacturer;
1, Wiremold 2400 Series or equal.
B. Description: UL -5, 2 inches wide by 1 inch height, two channel galvanized steel, combination
powerld ata.
C. Finish; Painted, ANSI 61 Color Selected by architect.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260535-5 SECTION 26 05 35
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES
D. Accessories: Transition fittings, divider plates, device mounting straps, couplings, combination
power/data cover plates, end plates and all other accessories necessary for a complete system in
locations indicated on Drawings,
2.43 TWO CELL SURFACE NON-METALLIC RACEWAY
A. Manufacturer:
1. Wiremold 5400 Series or equal.
B, Description; UL -5A, 5-114 inches wide by 1-314 inches height, two channel with individual (twin
snap) compartment covers, combination power/data.
C. Finish: White.
D. Accessories: Transition fittings, divider plates, device mounting straps, couplings, combination
power/data cover plates, end plates and all other accessories necessary for a complete system in
locations indicated on Drawings.
2.44 POP -OPEN ENCLOSURE
A. Manufacturers
1. FSR #T3U-3R - fsrinc.com
2. No Substitutions.
B. Description
1. Recessed table top enclosure with pop -open cover.
2. Provide double duplex receptacle.
3. Provide space for data jack where required.
C. Flush Cover:
1. Finish to be selected by Architect
2.15 HAND HOLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Quazite,
2. Approved Equal
B. Description: Precast polymer concrete or precast concrete, Non-conductive, non-flammable with
open bottom. Flanged, non-conductive, gasketed cover enclosure with stainless-steel cover
screws.
1, Load Rating: UL listed Tier 22 as suitable for driveway, parking lot and off -roadway applications
subject to occasional non -deliberate heavy vehicular traffic.
2. Cover inscribed with or "ELECTRIC" or other suitable description,
2.46 WIREWAY
A. Manufacturers:
1, Hoffman.
2. Cooper Industries,
3. Approved Equal.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260535-6 SECTION 26 05 35
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES
B. Description:
1, NEMA Type 1 Lay -In Galvanized Wireway, UL 870. Flat cover design. Size as shown on
drawings,
2. Provide hinged covers where noted on drawings.
3. Provide all elbows, tee's, covers and fittings as required
C. Finish:
1. To be selected by Architect/Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that interior of building is physically protected from weather.
B. Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed.
C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
D. Verify that supporting surfaces are ready to receive work.
E. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings, in approximate locations, unless dimensioned.
1. Obtain verification from Architect/Engineer for locations of outlets throughout prior to rough -in.
F. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive wire markers.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and to present neat appearance.
1. Route raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping.
2. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance to piping and 12 inch clearance to heat surfaces such as
flues and heating appliances.
3. Maintain required fire, acoustic, and vapor barrier rating when penetrating walls, Floors, and
ceilings.
4. Use conduit hangers and clamps; do not fasten with wire or perforated pipe straps.
5. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction.
6. Terminate conduit stubs with insulated bushings.
7. Use suitable caps to protect installed raceway against entrance of dirt and moisture.
8. Install expansion joints where raceway crosses building expansion joints.
B. Install electrical boxes as shown on the drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
equipment connections and regulatory requirements.
1. Locate and install electrical boxes to allow access. Provide access panels if required.
2. Locate and install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical
appearance.
3. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas,
4. Provide knockout closures for unused openings.
5. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets above counters, benches, backsplashes
and furniture,
C. Use recessed outlet boxes in finished areas and where indicated.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 260535-7 SECTION 26 05 35
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES
1. Secure boxes to interior wail and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow, for surface
finish thickness.
2. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel
channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.
3. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to
achieve neat openings for boxes.
4. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls; provide 6 inches separation, minimum; except
provide 24 inches separation, minimum in acoustic -rated walls.
5. Do not damage insulation,
D. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of walls, floors, partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods recognized by Underwriters Laboratory Fire Resistance Directory,
E, Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
F. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
G. Do not use powder -actuated anchors.
H. Cut or core structural members and thermal and moisture barriers only upon receiving permission
from Architect. Each Contractor shall be responsible for making necessary penetrations for the
completion of it's Work.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon
head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock
washers under all nuts.
Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in
hollow partitions,
END OF SECTION
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 260535-8 SECTION 26 05 35
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved RACEWAYS AND BOXES
SECTION 26 2100
LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical service requirements.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 19 - Conductors and Devices
B. Section 26 05 29 - Supporting Devices
C. Section 26 05 35 - Raceway and Boxes
D. Section 26 24 13 - Serivice and Distribution
E. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
F. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
G. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
H. Section 3123 16.13 - Trenching; Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Service Point; The point of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the premises
wiring as defined in NFPA 70, and as designated by the Utility Company.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; 2012.
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,
Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1,05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. No later than two weeks following date of the Agreement, notify Utility Company of anticipated
date of service.
B. Coordination:
1. Verify the following with Utility Company representative:
a. Utility Company requirements, including division of responsibility.
b. Exact location and details of utility point of connection.
c. Utility easement requirements,
d. Utility Company charges associated with providing service.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructions within
the spaces dedicated for electrical service and associated equipment,
3. Coordinate arrangement of service entrance equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2621 00-1 SECTION 26 2100
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
4. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
C. Arrange for Utility Company to provide permanent electrical service. Prepare and submit
documentation required by Utility Company,
D. Utility Company charges associated with providing permanent service to be paid by Owner.
E. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section to review
service requirements and details with Utility Company representative,
F. Scheduling:
1, Where work of this section involves interruption of existing electrical service, arrange service
interruption with Owner.
2, Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of installation.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures,
B. Utility Company letter of availability for providing electrical service to project.
C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations and
arrangement of Utility Company and service entrance equipment, metering provisions, required
clearances, and proposed service routing.
1. Obtain Utility company approval of shop drawings prior to submittal.
D. Drawings prepared by Utility Company.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:
1. IEEE C2 (National Electrical Safety Code).
2, NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).
3. The requirements of the Utility Company.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment, metering
Provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between Utility Company point
of supply and service entrance equipment.
B. Electrical Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.
C. Division of Responsibility:
1. Pad -Mounted Utility Transformers:
a. Transformer Pads: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company
requirements.
b. Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.
c. Transformer Grounding Provisions Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility
Company requirements.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 262100-2 SECTION 26 2100
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.: All Rights Reserved LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
d, Primary;
a) Trenching and Backfilling; Provided by Contractor,
b) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor,
c) Conductors; Furnished and installed by Utility Company.
e. Secondary:
a) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Contractor.
b) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor,
c) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Contractor (Service Point at transformer),
2. Terminations at Service Point: Provided by Utility Company,
3. Metering Provisions;
a. Meter Bases: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements.
b. Metering Transformer Cabinets: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company
requirements,
Metering Transformers; Furnished and installed by Utility Company,
Conduits Between Metering Transformers and Meters: Furnished and installed by
Contractor per Utility Company requirements.
Wiring Between Metering Transformers and Meters; Furnished and installed by Utility
Company.
D. Products Furnished by Contractor Comply with Utility Company requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B. Verify that ratings and configurations of service entrance equipment are consistent with the
indicated requirements.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work,
3.02 PREPARATION
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Utility Company requirements,
B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access,
D. Provide required trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 3123 16,13.
E. Provide directional boring of utility conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 35,
F. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 05 29,
G. Provide grounding and bonding for service entrance equipment in accordance with Section 26 05
26,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 262100-3 SECTION 26 2100
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
H. Identify service entrance equipment, including main service disconnect(s) in accordance with
Section 26 05 53.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 262100-4 SECTION 26 2100
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
SECTION 26 2413
SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A, Section Includes:
1. Main Switchboard Modifications (Relabeled DP -1).
2. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard.
3, Distribution Switchboards,
4. Portable Generator Plug Connector,
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electric Service System: Existing multiple point (two) service entrance locations (modified).
277/480 volts, three phase, four wire, 60 Hz wye. Underground service with secondary metering.
B. Grounding Electrode System:
1. Metal underground water pipe,
2. Rod electrode,
3, Metal frame of building.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Under Provisions of Division 01 - Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate relevant information on panelboards, switchboards, custom sections
and devices,
2. Product Data: Provide data on enclosed switches and circuit breakers, fuses and panelboard
circuit breakers.
a. For circuit breakers feeding transformers, provide circuit breaker time -current curves
overlayed with transformer inrush, FLA and primary/secondary thermal limit curves.
3. Test Reports: Submit for field inspection and testing. Include description of procedures,
duration, instruments used, and test values obtained. Present information in table comparing
acceptable values to actual values:
a. Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
b. Indicate final phase balance values for all panelboards, including neutral.
4. Operating and Maintenance Instructions:
a. Panelboard: Submit NEMA PB 2.1.
B. Submit Under Provisions of Section 01780 - Contract Closeout:
1. Test Reports: Submit for field inspection and testing. Include description of procedures,
duration, instruments used, and test values obtained. Present information in table comparing
acceptable values to actual values.
a. Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
b. Indicate final phase balance values for all panelboards, including neutral.
2. Operating and Maintenance Instructions:
a. Panelboard: Submit NEMA PB 2. 1.
3. Project Record Documents:
a. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes.
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 2624 13-1 SECTION 26 2413
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
b. Record actual locations of Panelboards, indicate actual branch circuit arrangement.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ground System Resistance: 5 ohms.
B. Phase balance per panelboard: 10 percent.
C. All panelboards shall be of same manufacturer for ease of future maintenance.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation."
B. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches,
D. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards
Rated 600 Volts or Less.
1.06 EQUIPMENT PADS
A. Electrical Equipment Pads: Equipment pads shall be provided for all free standing equipment. The
Electrical Contractor shall coordinate each pad requirement including dimensions, leave -out and
sleeve requirements.
B. Utility Transformer: Utility transformer pad shall be provided by General Contractor in accordance
with utility company's requirements. Electrical Contractor shall provide conduits, 4 -point
perimeter grounding loop with compartment grounding interconnects in accordance with utility
company requirements.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MAIN SWITCHBOARD MODIFICATIONS (DP -1)
A. Existing Conditions:
1. Existing Switchboard : ITE Imperial Corporation UniPower Switchboard.
2, Shop Order Number; 13-86328-430
3. Date: 11/6/1974
B. Manufacturers: Manufacturer or Underwriter's Laboratory -approved custom switchboard
manufacturer.
C. Description, Custom 1600 ampere, horizontal through bus sections with custom bus details to
connect into existing switchboard bus. Demolish metering, grounding and main device interior
components.
1, Enclosure: Existing NEMA 1 enclosure to be reused with new custom closure panels and UL
label,
2. AIC Rating: 42,000 symmetrical amperes.
3. Connections: Bolted bus connections, terminal lug connections in main section.
2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 26 24 13-2 SECTION 26 24 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Square D.
2, General Electric.
3. Siemens.
4. Substitutions : Or Approved Equal,
B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; lighting and appliance circuit breaker type
panelboard:
1. Description: As scheduled on Drawings,
2. Provide terminals rated and U.L. listed for use with 75 degrees C temperature rated
conductors.
3. Bussing; Shall be copper (all phases, neutral and ground)
4, Breakers: As scheduled on Drawings and specified hereafter.
a. Lighting: SWD and HID.
b. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: HACR rated.
5. Breaker Accessories: As scheduled on Drawings
2,03 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Square D.
2. General Electric,
3. Siemens.
4, Substitutions: Or Approved Equal,
B. Main Service Entrance Switchboards Description: NEMA PB -2, UL891, group mounted, class 1,
front accessible with zero sequence ground fault detection, NEMA 4 enclosure, service entrance
rated. Refer to panel schedule and Drawings for further information.
1. Section 1: Current Transformer Cabinet:
a. Utility: Commonwealth Edison Co. approved, with NEMA 4 CECHA approved meter fitting
and control wiring. Suitable for current transformers as indicated on Drawings. Locate
meter fitting at building exterior.
2. Accessibility: Front accessible only.
C. Description: NEMA PB -2, UL891, group mounted, class 1, front accessible, floor mounted. Refer
to panel schedules for further information.
1. Distribution Switchboards shall be a minimum of 30" wide,
D. Bussing: Shall be copper (all phases, neutral and ground).
E. Bus Connections Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance.
F. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard.
G. Breakers; Provide fixed thermal magnetic trip molded case breakers branch devices as indicated
on Drawings and scheduled at the end Section,
H. Concrete Curb; Provide concrete curb for free standing equipment.
2.04 PORTABLE GENERATOR PLUG CONNECTOR
A. Manufacturers:
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2624 13- 3 SECTION 26 24 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Emerson Appleton Powertite
2. ABB Russell Stoll Maxgard Interconnection System
3, Or Approved Equal
B. Description: UL 1686 compliant configuration, UL 1682 female receptacle with matching plug
mate. Pin and Sleef Power Connector, Angular adapter with junction box, body, pin and sleeve,
portable connector suitable for exterior (NEMA 4X) applications and standard service.
C. Housing; Cast Aluminum, 3114" ID Bushing, nominal with closure cap.
D. Ratings:
1, Voltage: 2771480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire f ground. 600 Volt RMS Maximum Working Voltage.
2. Ampacity: 400 amperes per cable connection. Certified for current interruption at full rated
current. Multiple cable connectors as indicated
3. Lug Capacity: 600 kCMIL.
2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers;
1. Square D.
2. General Electric.
3, Siemens.
4. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal.
B. Distribution Panelboard Description: NEMA PB -1, Wall mounted , front accessible, ampere and
voltage ratings as noted, NEMA 1 enclosure. Refer to panel schedule and Drawings for further
information.
1. Distribution Panelboards shall be a minimum of 30" wide.
C. Breakers: Provide fixed thermal magnetic trip molded case breakers branch devices as indicated
on Drawings and scheduled at the end Section.
D. Bussing: Shall be copper (all phases, neutral and ground).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Make arrangements with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
B. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size
installed,
C. Install panelboards to NEMA PB 1.1.
D. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise
directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2624 13-4 SECTION 26 24 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
F. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling.
Identify each as SPARE.
G. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the
panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper
phasing for multi -wire branch circuits.
H. Service equipment must be legibly field -marked with the maximum available fault current, including
the date the fault current calculation was performed and be of sufficient durability to withstand the
environment involved.
Field mark electrical equipment to warn qualified persons on the danger of electric arc flash, The
field -marking must be clearly visible to qualified persons before they inspect or work on the
equipment.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper
installation.
B. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient
ground reference point by passing minimum current of 10 amperes DC and measuring voltage
drop. Maximum resistance: 5 ohms.
C. Measure primary and secondary transformer voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean equipment finishes to remove paint and concrete splatters.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 2624 13-5 SECTION 26 24 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 26 3213
ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Packaged engine generator system and associated components and accessories:
1. Engine and engine accessory equipment.
2, Alternator (generator),
3, Generator set control system.
4. Generator set enclosure,
5. Maintenance cable tap lugs for temporary generator at output,
6. Remote annunciator panels.
B. Modification to existing Engineer generator set:
1. Remote annunciator panel and control wiring.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B. Section 2210 05 - Plumbing Piping: Gas piping.
C, Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems; Identification products and requirements.
F. Section 26 36 00 - Transfer Switches,
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
B. NECAIEGSA 404 - Standard for Installing Generator Sets; 2014.
C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2014.
D, NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code; 2015.
E. NFPA 37 - Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas
Turbines; 2015,
F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,
Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
G. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2013,
H. UL 1236 - Battery Chargers for Charging Engine -Starter Batteries; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
L UL 2200 - Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 3213 -1 SECTION 26 3213
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; AI! Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
J. ANSI/NEMA Compliance, Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA MG 1, "Motors and
Generators", and MG 2, "Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation
and Use of Electric Motors and Generators". Transfer switches shall comply with ICS 2.
K. IEEE Compliance; Comply with applicable portions of IEEE Std. 241, "IEEE Requirements
Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to standby power.
L. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of IEEE Standard 241, "IEEE Recommended
Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to standby power.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A, Coordination.
1. Coordinate compatibility of generator sets to be installed with work provided under other
sections or by others.
a, Transfer Switches: See Section 26 36 00.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment or
other potential obstructions within the spaces dedicated for engine generator system.
3. Coordinate arrangement of equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the
actual equipment to be installed.
4. Coordinate the work to provide electrical circuits suitable for the power requirements of the
actual auxiliary equipment and accessories to be installed.
5, Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Preinstallation Meeting; Convene one week before starting work of this section; require
attendance of all affected installers,
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product,
including ratings, configurations, dimensions, finishes, weights, service condition requirements,
and installed features. Include alternator starting capabilities, engine fuel consumption rates, and
cooling, combustion air, and exhaust requirements.
1. include generator set sound level test data.
2. Include characteristic trip curves for overcurrent protective devices upon request.
3. Include alternator thermal damage curve upon request.
4, Provide data showing internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery,
battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators and remote radiator (if
provided).
C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations of system
components, required clearances, and field connection locations. Include system interconnection
schematic diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
D. Evidence of qualifications for installer.
E. Evidence of qualifications for maintenance contractor (if different entity from installer).
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2632 13-2 SECTION 26 32 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
F. Manufacturer's factory emissions certification.
G. Source quality control test reports.
H. Provide NFPA 110 required documentation from manufacturer where requested by authorities
having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:
1. Certified prototype tests.
2. Torsional vibration compatibility certification.
3. NFPA 110 compliance certification.
4. Certified rated load test at rated power factor.
1. Manufacturer's detailed field testing procedures.
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on system operation, equipment
programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures and
intervals,
1. Include contact information for entity that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble
call-back service.
K. Executed Warranty: Submit documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name
and registered with manufacturer.
L. Maintenance contracts.
M. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of system components, installed circuiting
arrangements and routing, and final equipment settings.
1. Accurately record location of engine generator and mechanical and electrical connections,
N. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator system.
Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box,
3. Provide two additional sets of each fuel, oil, and air filter element required for the engine
generator system.
0. Product Data: Provide data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, and
internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery charger,
exhaust silencer, vibration isolators and remote radiator.
P. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for routine maintenance requirements, service manuals for
engine and, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and emergency maintenance procedures.
1,06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:
1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code),
2. NFPA 110 (Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems),
3. NFPA 37 (Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas
Turbines).
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 2632 13-3 SECTION 26 32 13
Copyright 2016 by KLLIBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications; Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
1. Authorized service facilities located within 50 miles of project site.
D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
three years documented experience with engine generator systems of similar size, type, and
complexity; manufacturer's authorized installer,
E. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified
qualifications.
1, Contract maintenance office located within 200 miles of project site.
Products: Listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm
acceptable to authorities raving jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated,
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store generator sets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and NECAIEGSA 404.
S. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or
heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to generator set
components, enclosure, and finish.
D. Accept packaged engine generator set and accessories on site in crates and verify damage,
E. Protect equipment from dirt and moisture by securely wrapping in heavy plastic.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide minimum one year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to defective
materials or workmanship.
1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A, Furnish service and maintenance of packaged engine generator system for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Packaged Engine Generator Set:
1. Caterpillar Inc: www.cat.com,
2. Cummins Power Generation Inc, www.cumminspower,com,
3, Generac Power Systems: www.generac.com/industrial.
4, Kohler Co: www.kohlerpower.com,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2632 13-4 SECTION 26 3213
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
B. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
A. Provide new engine generator system consisting of all required equipment, sensors, conduit,
boxes, wiring, piping, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a
complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.
System Description:
1, Application: Emergency/standby.
2. Configuration: Single packaged engine generator set operated independently (not in parallel).
C. Packaged Engine Generator Set:
1. Type: Gaseous (spark ignition).
2. Power Rating: As indicated on drawings, standby,
3. Voltage: As indicated on drawings.
4. Main Line Circuit Breaker:
a. Type: Thermal magnetic.
b. Trip Rating: As indicated on drawings.
c. Features:
a) Maintenance Cable Tap.
b) Lock -out, Tag -out Provisions,
D. Generator Set General Requirements:
1. Prototype tested in accordance with NFPA 110 for Level 1 systems.
2. Factory -assembled, with components mounted on suitable base,
3. List and label engine generator assembly as complying with UL 2200.
4, Power Factor: Unless otherwise indicated, specified power ratings are at 0.$ power factor for
three phase voltages and 1,0 power factor for single phase voltages.
5. Provide suitable guards to protect personnel from accidental contact with rotating parts, hot
piping, and other potential sources of injury.
6. Main Line Circuit Breakers: Provide factory -installed line side connections with suitable lugs for
load side connections.
a. NEMA AB 1 molded case circuit breaker on generator output with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole; sized in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70. Include
battery -voltage operated shunt trip, connection to open circuit breaker on engine failure.
Mount unit in enclosure to meet ANSI/NEMA 250 requirements.
E. Service Conditions: Provide engine generator system and associated components suitable for
operation under the service conditions at the installed location.
Starting and Load Acceptance Requirements:
1. Cranking Method: Cycle cranking complying with NFPA 110 (15 second crank period, followed
by 15 second rest period, with cranking limiter time-out after 3 cycles), unless otherwise
required,
2. Cranking Limiter Time -Out: If generator set fails to start after specified cranking period,
indicate overcrank alarm condition and lock -out generator set from further cranking until
manually reset.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2632 13-5 SECTION 26 3213
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
3. Start Time; Capable of starting and achieving conditions necessary for load acceptance within
10 seconds (NFPA 110, Type 10).
4. Maximum Load Step: Supports 100 percent of rated load in one step.
G. Exhaust Emissions Requirements;
1. Comply with federal (EPA), state, and local regulations applicable at the time of commissioning;
include factory emissions certification with submittals.
2. Do not make modifications affecting generator set factory emissions certification without
approval of manufacturer and Engineer. Where such modifications are made, provide field
emissions testing as necessary for certification.
H. Sound Level Requirements
1. Do not exceed 64 dBA when measured at 23 feet from generator set in free field (no sound
barriers) while operating at full load; include manufacturer's sound data with submittals,
1. System Capacity; As noted on drawings at elevation of 700 feet above sea level, continuous rating
using engine -mounted radiator.
J. Engine Accessories: Lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler, gear -driven water pump. Include
fuel pressure gage, water temperature gage, and lube oil pressure gage on engine -generator
control panel.
K. Coolant heater; Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, waterjacket heater. The heater
shall be sized as recommended by the equipment supplier. Heater voltage shall be as required.
L. Mounting; Provide unit with suitable spring -type vibration isolators and mount on structural steel
base and concrete pad.
M. Exerciser Clock; Provide solid state exerciser clock to set the day, time, and duration of generator
set exercise/test period. Provide without load selector switch for the exercise period.
N. Maintenance cable lugs: Provide lug connection for portable generator during maintenance
periods with lock -out, tag -out provisions at generator breaker assembly.
2.03 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A. Manufacturer; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide automatic transfer switches of
one of the following;
1. Automatic Switch Company,
2. Kohler Company.
3. Cummins,
B. Switch Ratings: Voltage, poles and size as shown on drawings, NEMA 1 type enclosure, switch.
C. Testing: Certified laboratory test data on a switch of the same design and rating shall be provided
to confirm the following switching abilities:
D. Overload and endurance per Tables 21.2 and 23.2 of UL -1008 when enclosed according to
Paragraph 1.6.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 26 3213-6 SECTION 26 32 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
E. Temperature rise tests after the overload and endurance tests to confirm the ability of the transfer
switches to carry their rated current within the allowable temperature limits of the insulation in
contact with current carrying parts.
F. No welding of contacts. Transfer switch must be operable to alternate source after the withstand
current tests.
G. Dielectric tests at 1960 volts, rms, minimum after the withstand current test.
H. The complete automatic transfer switch shall be tested to ensure proper operation of the individual
components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating transfer
time, voltage, frequency and time delay settings are in compliance with the specification
requirements.
1, The complete automatic transfer switch shall be subject to a dielectric strength test per NEMA
Standard ICS 1-109.05.
J. The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand capability in accordance with
IEEE Standard 472-1974 (ANSI C37.90a) and the impulse withstand voltage test in accordance
with NEMA Standard ICS 1-109.
K. The automatic transfer switch shall be rated to withstand the rms symmetrical short circuit current
available at the automatic transfer switch terminals, with the type of overcurrent protection, voltage
and XIR ratio.
L. The automatic transfer switch shall consist of a power transfer module and a control module,
interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. The automatic transfer switch shall be
mechanically held and electrically operated by a single -solenoid mechanism energized from the
source to which the load is to be transferred. The switch shall be rated for continuous duty and
inherently double throw. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two
possible positions - normal or emergency. The automatic transfer switch shall be suitable for use
with emergency sources such as engine generator source or another utility source.
M. The control module shall be supplied with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the
transfer switch for ease of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be solid state and
mounted on plug-in printed circuit boards. Printed circuit boards shall be keyed to prevent
incorrect installation. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade, plug-in type with dust
covers and locking clips, The following shall also be provided for the control module;
N. All phases of the normal shall be monitored line -to -line. Close differential voltage sensing shall be
provide don all phases. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 72 percent to 100 percent of
nominal and the dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 72 percent to 98 percent of the pickup
value. The transfer to emergency will be initiated upon reduction of normal source to 85 percent of
nominal voltage and retransfer to normal shall occur when normal source restores to 95 percent of
nominal.
0, Neutral conductor terminal lugs as required for the system.
P. All movable parts of the operating mechanism shall remain in positive mechanical contact with the
main contacts during the transfer operation without the use of separate mechanical interlocks.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 263213-7 SECTION 26 3213
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
Automatic operation of the switch shall not require power from any source other than the
line -to -line voltage of the source to which the switch is transferring.
Q. Each automatic transfer switch shall include the following standard accessories:
1. (TDNE) Time delay on transfer from Normal to Emergency (adjustable 0 to 60 seconds),
2. (TIDES) Time delay on Engine Starting (factory set at 3 seconds).
3. (TDEN) Time delay on transfer from Emergency to Normal adjustable 0 - 30 minutes).
4, (TDEC) Time delay on engine cool -off if not supplied with generator set.
5. Four position selector switch with white light. Permits four modes of switch operation -- TEST,
AUTO, OFF, and ENGINE START.
6. Frequency/voltage relay for emergency source,
7. Disconnect plug on wiring harness to disconnect switch control logic.
8. Main shaft auxiliary contact rated ten (10) ampere at 240V (one closed on normal and one
closed on emergency),
9. Green lamp to indicate switch in normal position and normal power is supplying loads.
10. Red lamp to indicate switch in emergency position and emergency power is supplying loads,
11.Inphase Monitor; Monitors normal and emergency sources and permits transfer when phase
voltages are 15 degrees and two (2) cycles. If the source supplying the load fails or drops
below 70 percent, the monitor will permit immediate transfer.
12, Load shedding contacts (2 NO and 2 NC) that operates from an adjustable 0.6 -60 seconds
prior to transfer in either direction and resets .6 - 60 seconds after transfer.
2.64 ENGINE AND ENGINE ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
A. Provide engine with adequate horsepower to achieve specified power output at rated speed,
accounting for alternator efficiency and parasitic loads.
B. Engine Starting System;
1. System Type: Electric, with DC solenoid -activated starting motor(s).
2, Battery(s):
a. Battery Type: Lead -acid.
b. Battery Capacity: Size according to manufacturer's recommendations for achieving starting
and load acceptance requirements under worst case ambient temperature; capable of
providing cranking through two complete periods of cranking limiter time-outs without
recharging.
c, Provide battery rack, cables, and connectors suitable for the supplied battery(s); size battery
cables according to manufacturer's recommendations for cable length to be installed,
3, Battery -Charging Alternator; Engine -driven, with integral solid-state voltage regulation.
4. Battery Charger:
a. Provide dual rate battery charger with automatic float and equalize charging modes and
minimum rating of 10 amps; suitable for maintaining the supplied battery(s) at full charge
without manual intervention,
b. Capable of returning supplied battery(s) from fully discharged to fully charged condition
within 24 hours, as required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 applications while carrying normal
loads.
c. Recognized as complying with UL 1236,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2632 13-8 SECTION 26 32 13
Copyright 2016 by KLLIBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
d. Furnished with integral overcurrent protection; current limited to protect charger during
engine cranking; reverse polarity protection.
e. Provide integral DC output ammeter and voltmeter with five percent accuracy.
f. Provide alarm output contacts as necessary for alarm indications.
g. Trickle type.
Battery Heater: Provide thermostatically controlled battery heater to improve starting under
cold ambient conditions.
6, Include remote starting control circuit, with MANUAL -OFF -REMOTE selector switch on
engine -generator control panel,
C. Engine Speed Control System (Governor):
1. Single Engine Generator Sets (Not Operated in Parallel): Provide electronic isochronous
governor for controlling engine speed/alternator frequency,
2. Electronic, mechanical adjustable to maintain engine speed within 0.5 percent, steady state,
and 5 percent, no load to full load, with recovery to steady state within 2 seconds following
sudden load changes.
D. Engine Lubrication System;
1. System Type: Full pressure, with engine -driven, positive displacement lubrication oil pump,
replaceable full -flow oil filter(s), and dip -stick for oil level indication. Provide oil cooler where
recommended by manufacturer,
E. Engine Cooling System:
1. System Type: Closed-loop, liquid -cooled, with unit -mounted radiator/fan and engine -driven
coolant pump; suitable for providing adequate cooling while operating at full load under worst
case ambient temperature.
2. Fan Guard: Provide suitable guard to protect personnel from accidental contact with fan.
3, Radiator: Radiator using glycol coolant, with blower type fan, sized to maintain safe engine
temperature in ambient temperature of 110 degrees F (43 degrees C), Radiator Air Flow
Restriction: 0.5 inches of water, maximum,
Engine Air Intake and Exhaust System:
1, Air Intake Filtration: Provide engine -mounted, replaceable, dry element filter,
2. Engine Exhaust Connection: Provide suitable, approved flexible connector for coupling engine
to exhaust system,
3. Exhaust Silencer: Provide critical grade or better exhaust silencer with sound attenuation not
less than basis of design; select according to manufacturer's recommendations to meet sound
performance requirements, where specified.
G, Engine speed: 1800 rpm.
H. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure, overspeed, and
engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer.
2.05 ALTERNATOR (GENERATOR)
A. Alternator: 4 -pole, 1800 rpm (60 Hz output) revolving field, synchronous generator complying with
NEMA MG 1; connected to engine with flexible coupling; voltage output configuration as indicated,
with reconnectabie leads for 3 phase alternators.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2632 13-9 SECTION 26 32 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
B. Exciter:
1. Exciter Type: Brushless; provide permanent magnet generator (PMG) excitation system;
self-excited (shunt) systems are not permitted.
2. PMG Excitation Short-Circult Current Support: Capable of sustaining 300 percent of rated
output current for 10 seconds.
3. Voltage Regulation (with PMG excitation), Plus/minus 0.5 percent for any constant load from
no load to full load.
C. Temperature Rise: Comply with UL 2200,
D. Insulation System: NEMA MG 1, Class H; suitable for alternator temperature rise.
E. Enclosure: NEMA MG 1, drip -proof.
F. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than five percent.
G. Voltage Regulation: Include generator -mounted volts per Hertz exciter -regulator to match engine
and generator characteristics, with voltage regulation +1- one percent from no load to full load.
Include manual controls to adjust voltage drop +I- 5 percent voltage level, and voltage gain.
2.06 GENERATOR SET CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Provide microprocessor -based control system for automatic control, monitoring, and protection of
generator set. Include sensors, wiring, and connections necessary for functions/indications
specified.
B. Control Panel:
1. Control Panel Mounting: Unit -mounted unless otherwise indicated; vibration isolated.
2. Generator Set Control Functions:
a. Automatic Mode: Initiates generator set startlshutdown upon receiving corresponding signal
from remote device (e.g. automatic transfer switch).
b. Manual Mode: Initiates generator set start/shutdown upon direction from operator.
c. Reset Mode: Clears all faults, allowing generator set restart after a shutdown.
d, Emergency Stop: Immediately shuts down generator set (without time delay) and prevents
automatic restarting until manually reset.
e. Cycle Cranking: Programmable crank time, rest time, and number of cycles.
f. Time Delay: Programmable for shutdown (engine cooldown) and start (engine warmup).
g. Voltage Adjustment: Adjustable through range of plus/minus 5 percent.
h. Push -to -test indicator lamps, one each for low oil pressure, high water temperature,
overspeed, and overcrank.
3. Generator Set Status lndlcations:
a. Voltage (Volts AC): Line -to -line, line -to -neutral for each phase.
a) 3-112 inch dial, 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch.
b. Current (Amps): For each phase.
a) 3-112 inch dial, 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch.
c. Frequency (Hz).
a) 45-65 Hz range, 3-112 inch dial.
d. Real power (W/kW).
e. Reactive power (VARIkVAR).
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 32 13-10 SECTION 26 3213
Copyright 2016 by KLt1BER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
f. Apparent power (VA/kVA).
g. Power factor.
h. Duty Level Actual load as percentage of rated power.
1. Engine speed (RPM).
j, Battery voltage (Volts DC).
k. Engine oil pressure,
I, Engine coolant temperature,
m. Engine run time.
n, Generator powering load (position signal from transfer switch),
o. Engine running time meter.
p. Auxiliary Relay: 3PDT, operates when engine runs, with contact terminals prewired to
terminal strip.
4. Generator Set Protection and Warning/Shutdown Indications:
a, Comply with NFPA 110; configurable for NFPA 110 Level 1 or Level 2, or NFPA 99 systems
including but not limited to the following protections/indications:
a) Overcrank (shutdown).
b) Low coolant temperature (warning).
c) High coolant temperature (warning).
d) High coolant temperature (shutdown).
e) Low oil pressure (shutdown).
f) Overspeed (shutdown).
g) Low fuel level (warning),
h) Low coolant level (warn inglshutdown),
i) Generator control not in automatic mode (warning),
j) High battery voltage (warning).
k) Low cranking voltage (warning).
1) Low battery voltage (warning).
m) Battery charger failure (warning).
b. In addition to NFPA 110 requirements, provide the following protections/indications: .
a) High AC voltage (shutdown).
b) Low AC voltage (shutdown),
c) High frequency (shutdown).
d) Low frequency (shutdown).
e) Overcurrent (shutdown),
c. Provide contacts for local and remote common alarm,
d. Provide lamp test function that illuminates all indicator lamps,
Other Control Panel Features:
a. Event log,
b. Remote monitoring capability via PC.
C. Remote Annunciator:
Remote Annunciator Mounting: Wall -mounted; Provide flush -mounted annunciator for finished
areas and surface -mounted annunciator for non -finished areas unless otherwise indicated,
2. Generator Set Status Indications:
a. Generator powering load (via position signal from transfer switch).
b. Communication functional.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1417 2632 13- 11 SECTION 26 32 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
3. Generator Set Warning/Shutdown Indications;
a. Comply with NFPA 110 for Level 1 systems including but not limited to the following
indications:
a) Overcrank (shutdown),
b) Low coolant temperature (warning).
c) High coolant temperature (warning).
d) High coolant temperature (shutdown).
e) Low oil pressure (shutdown),
f) Overspeed (shutdown).
g) Low fuel level (warning),
h) Low coolant level (warn inglshutdown).
i) Generator control not in automatic mode (warning).
j) High battery voltage (warning),
k) Low cranking voltage (warning).
1) Low battery voltage (warning).
m) Battery charger failure (warning).
b, Provide audible alarm with silence function.
c. Provide lamp test function that illuminates all indicator lamps.
2.07 GENERATOR SET ENCLOSURE
A. Enclosure Type: Sound attenuating, weather protective,
B. Enclosure Material: Steel or aluminum.
1. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the
manufacturers standard color.
C, Hardware Material: Stainless steel,
D. Color: Manufacturers standard.
E. Access Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike.
F. Openings; Designed to prevent bird/rodent entry.
1. Housing shall provide ample airflow for generator set operation. the housing shall have hinged
side -access doors and rear control door.
G. External Drains: Extend oil and coolant drain lines to exterior of enclosure for maintenance
service.
H. Sound Attenuating Enclosures: Line enclosure with non -hydroscopic, self -extinguishing
sound -attenuating material,
I, Exhaust Silencers: Where exhaust silencers are mounted within enclosure in main engine
compartment, insulate silencer to minimize heat dissipation as necessary for operation at rated
load under worst case ambient temperature.
2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A, See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 2632 13-12 SECTION 26 3213
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
B. Perform production tests on generator sets at factory to verify operation and performance
characteristics prior to shipment. Include certified test report with submittals.
C. Generator Set production testing to include, at a minimum;
1. Operation at rated load and rated power factor.
2. Single step load pick-up.
3, Transient and steady state voltage and frequency performance.
4. Operation of safety shutdowns,
D. Rating: Capacity as indicated, standby service, voltage as indicated, 60Hz at 1800 rpm.
E. Skid -Mounted Fuel Tank: See drawings for size. Steel tank, with fill and vent,
F. Batteries; Heavy duty, lead -acid storage batteries, 170 ampere -hours minimum capacity. Match
battery voltage to starting system. Include necessary cables and clamps.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of generator sets and auxiliary equipment are consistent
with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that rough -ins for field connections are in the proper locations.
D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive equipment.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
F. Verify that required utilities are available in proper location and ready for use,
G. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1,
B. install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
C. Install generator sets and associated accessories in accordance with NECAIEGSA 404.
D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access,
E. Unless otherwise indicated, mount generator set on properly sized 6 inch high concrete pad
constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00. Provide suitable vibration isolators, where not
factory installed.
F. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
G. Use manufacturer's recommended oil and coolant, suitable for the worst case ambient
temperatures.
H. Provide gas piping in accordance with Section 2210 05,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2632 13-13 SECTION 26 32 13
Copyright 2016 by KLJBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
L Provide engine exhaust piping in accordance with Section 23 51 00, where not factory installed,
1. Include piping expansion joints, piping insulation, thimble, condensation trap/drain, rain cap,
hang erslsupports, etc. as indicated or as required.
2. Do not exceed manufacturer's maximum back pressure requirements.
J. Install exhaust silencer in accordance with Section 23 5100, where not factory installed.
K. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
L. Identify system wiring and components in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A, See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Notify Owner and Architect/Engineer at least two weeks prior to scheduled inspections and tests.
C. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections
and tests and for observation by their personnel.
D. Provide all equipment, tools, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing, including
load bank and fuel.
E. Preliminary inspection and testing to include, at a minimum:
1, Inspect each system component for damage and defects.
2. Verify tightness of mechanical and electrical connections are according to manufacturer's
recommended torque settings,
3. Check for proper oil and coolant levels.
F. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
G. Perform acceptance test in accordance with NFPA 110.
H. Inspection and testing to include, at a minimum:
1, Verify compliance with starting and load acceptance requirements.
2. Verify voltage and frequency; make required adjustments as necessary,
3. Verify phase sequence.
4. Verify control system operation, including safety shutdowns,
5. Verify operation of auxiliary equipment and accessories (e.g. battery charger, heaters, etc.).
6. Perform load tests in accordance with NFPA 110 (1.5 hour building load test followed by 2 hour
full load test).
a. During test, record the following at 20 minute intervals:
a) Kilowatts.
b) Amperes.
c) Voltage.
d) Coolant temperature.
e) Room temperature.
f) Frequency.
g) Oil pressure.
b. Test alarm and shutdown circuits by simulating conditions.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2632 13-14 SECTION 26 3213
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
I. Provide field emissions testing where necessary for certification.
,i, Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with
contract documents,
3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide the services of manufacturer's representative to prepare and start system.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 0179 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration, Demonstrate proper operation of system to Owner, and correct deficiencies or
make adjustments as directed,
D. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of system.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional
training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training,
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4, Location: At project site.
5. Describe loads connected to standby system and restrictions for future load additions,
6. Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate that system operates to
provide standby power.
E. After successful acceptance test and just prior to Substantial Completion, replace air, oil, and fuel
filters.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed engine generator system from subsequent construction operations.
3.08 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 0170 00 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service,
B. Provide to Owner at no extra cost, a separate maintenance contract for the service and
maintenance of engine generator system for one year from date of Substantial Completion;
Include a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment,
inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.
C, Conduct site visit at least once every three months to perform inspection, testing, and preventive
maintenance. Submit report to Owner indicating maintenance performed along with evaluations
and recommendations,
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 26 32 13-15 SECTION 26 3213
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
D. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner;
1. Provide on-site response within 4 hours of notification,
2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner,
3, Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based
on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly rate and definition of
normal working hours in maintenance contract.
E, Maintain an on-site log listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition
of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts replaced,
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 2632 13-16 SECTION 26 32 13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved ENGINE GENERATORS
SECTION 26 36 00
TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Transfer switches for low -voltage (600 V and less) applications and associated accessories;
B. Manual Transfer Switch.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems, Identification products and requirements.
C. Section 26 3213 - Engine Generators: Testing requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.
C. NEMA ICS 10 Part 1 - Industrial Control and Systems Part 1: Electromechanical AC Transfer
Switch Equipment; 2005.
D, NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
2013.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,
Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. UL 1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, switch size, ratings and size of switching
and overcurrent protective devices, operating logic, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and
enclosure details.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
D. Operation Data: Instructions for operating equipment under emergency conditions when engine
generator is running.
E. Maintenance Data: Routine preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule. List special tools,
maintenance materials, and replacement parts.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 36 00 -1 SECTION 26 36 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRANSFER SWITCHES
1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).
B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.
C. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100
miles of Project.
E. Supplier Qualifications Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three years
documented experience.
F, Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
1. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 1008, "Automatic Transfer
Switches".
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ASCO Power Technologies, LP: www.asco.com.
B. Eaton Corporation, Cutler -Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.
C. Kohler: www.kohlerpowersystems.com.
D. Cummins.
E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements,
2.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES
A, Provide complete power transfer system consisting of all required equipment, conduit, boxes,
wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating
system that provides the functional intent indicated,
B. Construction Type: Only "contactor type" (open contact) transfer switches are acceptable. Do not
use "breaker type" (enclosed contact) transfer switches.
C. Comply with NEMA ICS 10 Part 1, and list and label as complying with UL 1008 for the
classification of the intended application (e.g, emergency, optional standby),
D. Do not use double throw safety switches or other equipment not specifically designed for power
transfer applications and listed as transfer switch equipment.
E. Load Classification: Classified for total system load (any combination of motor, electric discharge
lamp, resistive, and tungsten lamp loads with tungsten lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of the
continuous current rating) unless otherwise indicated or required,
F. Switching Methods:
1, Open Transition:
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 2636 00-2 SECTION 26 36 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.: All Rights Reserved TRANSFER SWITCHES
a. Provide break -before -make transfer without a neutral position that is not connected to either
source, and with interlocks to prevent simultaneous connection of the load to both sources.
2. Obtain control power for transfer operation from line side of source to which the load is to be
transferred.
G. Service Conditions: Provide transfer switches suitable for continuous operation at indicated
ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
H, Enclosures:
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250; As indicated on the drawings.
2. Finish; Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
L Short Circuit Current Rating:
1, Withstand and Closing Rating; Provide transfer switches, when protected by the supply side
overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed withstand and closing rating not less
than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.
J. Non -Automatic Transfer Switches:
1. Description: Transfer switches with manually initiated transfer between sources; electrically
operated and mechanically held. Electrical operator shall be a single solenoid mechanism,
momentarily energized.
2, Control Functions:
a. Manual source selection. mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible
positions (normal and emergency),
b. Outputs:
a) Auxiliary contacts; one set for each switch position.
3. Status Indications:
a. Connected to alternate/emergency source.
b. Connected to primary/normal source.
G, Alternate/emergency source available.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Indicating Lights: Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate NORMAL SOURCE AVAILABLE,
ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, and SWITCH POSITION.
1, Green lamp to indicate switch in normal position and normal power is supplying loads.
2 Red lamp to indicate switch in emergency position and emergency power is supplying loads.
B. Test Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to simulate failure of normal source.
C. Two position selector switch with white light. Permits two modes of switch operation --
TRANSFER TO NORMAL, TRANSFER TO GENERATOR,
D. Disconnect plug on wiring harness to disconnect switch control logic.
E. Main shaft auxiliary contact rated ten (10) ampere at 240V (one closed on normal and one closed
on emergency).
F. Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts; 1 normally open; 1 normally closed.
G. Enclosure: ICS 10, Type 1, finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 263600-3 SECTION 26 36 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings,
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of transfer switches are consistent with the indicated
requirements.
C. Verify that rough -ins for field connections are in the proper locations,
D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transfer switches,
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
B, install transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access,
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
E. Install transfer switches plumb and level.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor -mounted transfer switches on properly sized 3 inch high
concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.
G. Provide grounding and banding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
H. Identify transfer switches and associated system wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 53,
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B, Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
C, Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with
contract documents,
D, Provide the services of the manufacturer's technical representative to check out transfer switch
connections and operation and place in service.
E. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 0140 00.
F. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
G. Perform inspections and tests fisted in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.22,3,
3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide the services of the manufacturer's technical representative to check out transfer switch
connections and operations and place in service,
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 263600-4 SECTION 26 36 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRANSFER SWITCHES
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstrate operation of transfer switch in normal, and emergency modes.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 0170 00 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of transfer switches for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 26 36 00-5 SECTION 26 36 00
Copyright 2016 by KLLIBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRANSFER SWITCHES
SECTION 3122 00
GRADING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removal and storage of topsoil.
B. Rough grading and recontouring the site for positive water drainage.
C. Topsoil and finish grading for planting.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 3123 16.13 - Trenching: Trenching and backfilling for utilities.
B. Section 32 92 19 - Seeding: Finish ground cover and additional topsoil requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site or as specified in Section 32 92 19,
1. Graded.
2. Free of roots, rocks larger than 112 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
B, Verify limits of work areas.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities.
1. Contact Joint Utility Locating Information for Excavators (JULIE 500-592-0123) before start of
excavating work to ensure that existing utilities on the property are located and properly
protected.
C. Locate, identify, and protect from damage above- and below -grade utilities to remain.
D. Protect site features to remain, including but not limited to bench marks, survey control points,
existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs, from damage by grading equipment and
vehicular traffic,
E. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain as a portion of final
landscaping.
3.03 ROUGH GRADING
A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re -landscaped, or re -graded, without mixing
with foreign materials.
PROJECT NO. 16-172-1017 31 22 00 - 1 SECTION 3122 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER INC.; All Rights Reserved GRADING
B. Do not remove topsoil when wet.
C, Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re -landscaped, or re -graded,
D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture
content.
E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.
F, Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill,
3.04 SOIL REMOVAL and STOCKPILING
A. Stockpile topsoil to be re -used on site; remove remainder from site,
B. Remove excavated subsoil from site.
C, Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 2 feet; protect from erosion.
3.05 FINISH GRADING
A. Before Finish Grading:
1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected.
2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.
B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 112 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated
with petroleum products.
C. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.
D. Place topsoil in areas where sodding are indicated.
E. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade.
F, Place topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses:
1. Areas to be Sodded: 4 inches,
G. Place topsoil during dry weather.
H. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.
L Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage.
J. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of
subgrade.
K. Lightly compact placed topsoil,
3.06 REPAIR AND RESTORATION
A. Existing Facilities, Utilities, and Site Features to Remain: If damaged due to this work, repair or
replace to original condition.
B, Other Existing Vegetation to Remain: If damaged due to this work, replace with vegetation of
equivalent species and size.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 312200-2 SECTION 31 22 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved GRADING
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water.
B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 312200-3 SECTION 31 22 00
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved GRADING
SECTION 3123 16.13
TRENCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Trenching, backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 3122 00 - Grading: Site grading.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade Elevations: To match existing conditions.
B. Subgrade Elevations: 6 inches below finish grade elevations.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg
(10 -Ib) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; 2010.
B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibflft3 (600 kN-mlm3)); 2012.
C. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibflft3 (2,700 kN mlm3)); 2012.
D. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System); 2011.
E. SSRBC - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, adopted by the Illinois
Department of Transportation on January 1, 2002, including applicable current Supplemental
Specifications and Special Provisions,
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Compaction Density Test Reports.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.
B. Easements for existing utilities, both public and private, and utilities within public rights-of-way are
shown on the drawings according to available records. If existing utility lines are encountered
which conflict in location with new construction, notify Architect/Engineer.
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule, sequence and coordinate the work of this section, and prior and subsequent portions of
the work, in accordance with the requirements of Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3123 16.13 - 1 SECTION 3123 16.13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC,; All Rights Reserved TRENCHING
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIALS
A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site,
1. Graded.
2, Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris, waste, frozen
materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter,
B. Structural Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site.
C. Granular Fill - Gravel - Fill Type CA -7; Pit run washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material
and debris,
1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW.
D. Granular Fill: Conforming to SSRBC Article 1004.04; CA -7 or CA -11, except crushed concrete or
blast furnace slag is not permitted,
E. Fine Granular Fill: Conforming to SSRBC Article 1003.04.
F. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and
organic matter.
1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol SW.
G. Topsoil: See Section 31 22 00.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of
soil material.
B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
B. See Section 31 22 00 for additional requirements,
3.03 TRENCHING
A. Notify Arch itecVEngineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in
area until notified to resume work,
B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored.
C, Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow Inspection of installed utilities.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3123 16,13 - 2 SECTION 31 23 16.13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRENCHING
E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.
F. Remove large stones and other hard matter that could damage piping or impede consistent
backfilling or compaction.
G. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re -use from site.
H. Remove excess excavated material from site.
1. Pump out accumulated water in excavated trenches.
J. Obtain, erect, maintain and remove signs, covers, barricades, flagmen and other control devices
necessary for the purpose of diverting, regulating, warning or guiding pedestrian and vehicular
traffic at open excavations.
1. Placement and Maintenance of Traffic Control Devices: In accordance with applicable parts of
SSRBC Article 147.14.
3.64 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT
A, Out out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill.
B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.
C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.
3.05 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials.
B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen
or spongy subgrade surfaces.
D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.
E. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches
compacted depth.
F. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches
compacted depth.
G. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual
grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.
H. Correct areas that are over -excavated,
1. Thrust bearing surfaces: Fill with concrete.
2, Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent of
maximum dry density,
I. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:
1, Under paving, slabs -on -grade, and similar construction, 98 percent of maximum dry density.
2. At other locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density.
J. Reshape and re -compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3123 16.13 - 3 SECTION 3123 16.13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRENCHING
3,06 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS
A, Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated,
B, Utility Piping and Conduits :
1. Bedding: Use fine granular fill,
2. Cover with general fill for lawn or planted areas.
3. Cover with granular fill for paved areas,
4. Fill up to subgrade elevation.
5, Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density under lawn or planted
areas,
6. Compact in maximum 6 inch lifts to 98 percent of maximum dry density under paved areas.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of General Backfilling; Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations,
B, Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations,
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 0140 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and
testing,
B. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in
accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO
T 180,
C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, See Section 0140 00 for procedures,
3.09 CLEANING
A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile,
B. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile
area to prevent standing surface water,
C. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT N0, 15-172-1017 3123 16,13 - 4 SECTION 31 2316.13
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TRENCHING
SECTION 32 92 19
SEEDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparation of subsoil,
B. Placing topsoil.
C. Seeding, mulching and fertilizer.
D. Maintenance.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 3122 00 - Grading: Topsoil material.
B. Section 3122 00 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the
work of this section.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,
Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak,
Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will,
Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Maintenance Data Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass height;
types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer ,
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEED MIXTURE
A. Seed Mixture:
1, Kentucky Blue Grass: 80 percent.
2. Perennial Rye: 20 percent.
2.02 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth,
taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; pH value of
minimum 5,4 and maximum 7.0.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3292 19-1 SECTION 32 92 19
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SEEDING
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A, Fertilizer 18-24-6 analysis starter fertilizer; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the
elements derived from organic sources.
B. Water; Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of grass.
C. Erosion Fabric, Jute matting, open weave. Installed at all areas of affected work after seeding.
D, Herbicide; Super Trimec as manufactured by PBI?Grodon Corporation.,
E, Stakes: Softwood lumber, chisel pointed,
F. String: Inorganic fiber,
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 3122 00,
B. Place topsoil in accordance with Section 3122 00.
3.03 FERTILIZING
A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction.
C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed.
D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.
E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer,
3.04 SEEDING
A. Apply seed at a rate of 5.5 lbs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly,
B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day.
C. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods.
D. Immediately following seeding and compacting, install erosion fabric at all areas of affected work.
Maintain clear of shrubs and trees.
E, Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches
of soil,
F. Following germination, immediately re -seed areas without germinated seeds that are larger than 4
by 4 inches.
PROJECT NO. 15-172-1017 3292 19-2 SECTION 32 92 19
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SEEDING
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string around area periphery. Set string height to 24 inches,
Space stakes at 120 inches.
B. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 1 inches per foot or greater with erosion fabric. Roll fabric
onto slopes without stretching or pulling.
C, Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6 inch deep excavated topsoil
trench. Provide 12 inch overlap of adjacent rolls, Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with
adjacent soil.
D, Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36 inch intervals with stakes,
E. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil,
F. At'sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6
inches,
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide maintenance at no extra cost to Owner; Owner will pay for water,
B. See Section 0170 00 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
C. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits a
vigorous growing condition,
D. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out,
E. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities,
F. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.
G. Immediately reseed areas that show bare spots.
H. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period,
END OF SECTION
PROJECT NO, 15-172-1017 32 92 19-3 SECTION 32 92 19
Copyright 2016 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SEEDING
ATTACHMENT C
VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
ATTACHMENT C
LIST OF DRAWINGS
DATE LAST
SHEET NOS,
SHEET TITLES
REVISED
G100
Cover Sheet, General Notes, Symbols, & Drawing Index
11/11/2016
A101
Equipment Wall Details
11/11/2016
E010
Electrical Symbols List & Panel Schedules
11/11/2016
E100
Electrical Site Plan
11/11/2016
E300
Electrical Lower Level Power Plan
11/11/2016
E310
Electrical Main Level Power Plan
11/11/2016
E800
Electrical One -Line Riser Diagram & Details
11/11/2016
-1-
VILLAGE OF OAK. BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
ATTAC14MENT D
SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
1. Contractor shall have five (5) years of experience which is comparable in type and scope
to this project.
2. Work hours are 7:00 a.m., to 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday. Any deviation is subject
to the approval of the Village representative.
3. The project will be done on consecutive work days, excluding weekends and holidays
observed by the Village, until completed, delays only to inclement weather,
4. Contractor is required to obtain all necessary permits from the Village of Oak Brook, and
schedule required inspections through Development Services.
5. The Contractor shall supply to the Village, phone numbers where he/she can be reached
after normal working hours.
6. The Contractor must submit all manufacturers' literature on all materials that will be used
on this project, including M.S.D.S. (Material Safety Data Sheets) prior to any work
beginning.
7. A storage location for supplies, ladders and scaffolding shall be mutually agreed upon
between the Village and the contractor before any material is stored on site. The
Contractor must deliver material with manufacturers labels intact and legible, store
material on raised platforms and cover material ,N ith protective covering.
8. Before work is started, Contractor must deliver to the job site sufficient material to
complete the project.
9. If a dumpster is required, the location of the dumpster placement shall be mutually agreed
upon between the Village and the contractor.
10. All ladders and scaffolding shall be maintained in prior working order during the course
of this project and shall be secured at the end of each workday.
11. Contractor must provide barricades to ensure that falling debris will not injure anyone,
and to prevent public access to the work area at all times. Yellow "CAUTION" tape will
be placed below the immediate work areas of laborers and scaffolds to warn the public of
people working overhead.
ATTACHMENT D
12. At all times, Contractor must keep the work and storage areas in a clean, orderly, and a
picked up manner, to prevent debris from blowing. Clean adjoining streets and immediate
vicinity at the end of each work day. Sidewalks, windowsills, roofs and other work areas
will be broom swept to remove all debris. Daily material and debris not placed into
dumpster will be removed from the site.
13. Upon completion of the project the work area shall be cleaned. All debris and remaining
material and supplies shall be removed from the jobsite, including the dumpster within 72
hours of completion.
14. Upon completion the Contractor shall supply a one year warranty covering material and
workmanship; contractor shall submit sample warranty with bid.
VILLAGE OF ®AK BROOK
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
APPENDIX 1
PREVAILING WAGES
Cook County Prevailing Wage for July 2015
(See explanation of column headings at bottom of wages)
Trade Dame
RG TYP
C Base
FRMAN
M -F>8
OSA OSH
H/W
Pensn Vac
Trng
ASBESTOS ABT -GEN
ALL
39.400
39.950
1.5
1.5
2.0
13.98
10.72
0.000
0.500
ASBESTOS ABT -MEC
BLD
36.340
38.B40
1.5
1.5
2.0
11.47
10.96
0.000
0.720
BOILERI4AKER
PLD
47.070
51.300
2.0
2.0
2.0
6.970
18.13
0.000
0.400
BRICK MASON
BLD
43.780
48.160
1.5
1.5
2.0
10.05
14.43
0.000
1.030
CARPENTER
ALL
44,350
46,350
1.5
1.5
2.0
11.79
16.39
0.000
0.630
CEMENT MASON
ALL
43.750
45.750
2.0
1.5
2.0
13.05
14.45
0.000
0.480
CERAMIC TILE FLASHER
BLD
36.810
0.000
1.5
1,5
2,0
10.55
9.230
0.000
0.770
COMM. ELECT.
BLD
40.000
42.800
1.5
1.5
2.0
8.670
12.57
1.100
0.750
ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP
ALL
46.100
51.100
1,5
1.5
2.0
10.76
14.87
0.000
0.460
E7 ECTRIC PTATR GRNDMIAN
ALL
37.050
52.500
1.5
2.0
2.0
8.630
12.28
0.000
0.370
ELECTRIC PWR LINEHAN
LLL
47,500
52.500
1.5
2.0
1.5
11.06
15.75
0.000
0.480
ELECTRICIAN
ALL
45.000
48.000
1.5
1.5
2.0
13.83
15.27
0.000
1.000
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR
BLD
50.800
57.150
2.0
2.0
2.0
13.57
14.21
4,060
0.600
FENCE EREC"OR
ALL
37.340
39.340
1.5
1.5
2.0
13.05
12.06
0.000
0.300
GLL2=R
BLD
40.500
42.000
1.5
2.0
2.0
13.14
16.99
0.000
0.940
F?T/FROST IIvSULP>TOR
BLD
48.450
50.950
1.5
1.5
2.0
11.47
12,16
0.000
0.720
IRON WORKER
ALL
44.200
46.200
2.0
2,0
2,0
13.65
21.14
0.000
0.350
LABORER
0.500
LATHER
0.630
MACHINIST
0.000
MARBLE FINISHERS
0.620
MARBLE MASON
0.780
MATERIAL TESTER I
0.500
MATERIALS TESTER II
0.500
MILLWRIGHT
0.630
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENG7NEFR
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
ALL
39.200
39.950
1.5
ALL
44.350
46.350
1.5
BLD
45.350
47.850
1.5
ALL
32.400
34.320
1.5
BLD
43.030
47,330
1.5
ALL 29.200 0.000 1.5
ALL 34.200 0.000 1.5
ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5
SLD 1 48.100 52..100 2.0
SLD 2 46.800 52.100 2.0
BLD 3 44.250 52.100 2.0
BLD 4 42.500 52.100 2.0
BLD 5 51.850 52.100 2.0
BLD 6 49.100 52.100 2.0
BLD 7 51.100 52.100 2.0
FLT 1 53.600 53.600 1.5
FLT 2 52.100 53.600 1.5
FLT 3 46.400 53.600 1.5
FLT 4 38.550 53.600 1.5
FLT 5 55.100 53.600 1.5
FLT 6 35.000 35.000 1.5
HWY 1 46.300 50.300 1.5
HWY 2 45.750 50.300 1.5
HWY 3 43.700 50.300 1.5
HWY 4 42.300 50.300 1,5
HWY 5 41..1.00 50.300 1.5
HWY 6 49.300 50.300 1.5
HWY 7 47.300 50.300 1.5
APPENDIX 1
1.5
2.0
13.98
10.72
0.000
1.5
2.0
13.29
16.39
0.000
1.5
2.0
7,260
8.950
1.850
1.5
2.0
10.05
13.75
0.000
1.5
2.0
10.05
14.10
0.000
1.5
2.0
13.98
10.72
0.000
1.5
2.0
13.98
10.72
0.000
1.5
2.0
13.29
16.39
0.000
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.10
11.80
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.10
11.05
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.10
11.80
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.10
11.80
1.900
1..5
2.0
11.10
11.80
1.900
1.5
2.0
16.60
11.05
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
1.5
2.0
1.7.55
12.65
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
1..5
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1.900
1.5 2.0 17.55 12.65 1,900
APPENDIX 1
ORNAMNTL IRON WORKER
ALL
45.000
47.500
2.0
2.0
2.0
13.55
17.94
0.000
0.650
PAINTER
ALL
41.750
46.500
1.5
1.5
1,5
11.50
11.10
0.000
0.770
PAINTER SIGNS
BLD
33.920
38.090
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.600
2.710
0.000
0.000
PILEDRIVER
ALL
44.350
46.350
1.5
1.5
2.0
13.29
16.39
0.000
0.630
PIPEFITTER
BLD
46.000
49.000
1.5
1.5
2.0
9.000
15.85
0.000
1.780
PLASTERER
SLD
43.430
46.040
1,5
1.5
2.0
13.05
14.43
0.000
1.020
PLL7MDF R
BLD
46.650
48.650
1.5
1.5
2.0
13.18
11.46
0.000
0.680
ROOFER
SLD
41.000
44.000
1.5
1,5
2.0
8.280
1.0.54
0.000
0,530
SHEETMETAL WORKER
BLD
42.230
45.610
1.5
1.5
2.0
10.53
20.68
0.000
0.720
SIGN HANGER
BLD
31.310
33.810
1.5
1.5
2.0
4.850
3.280
0.000
0.000
SPRINKLER FITTER
BLD
49,200
51.200
1.5
1.5
2.0
11.75
9.650
0.000
0.550
STEEL ERECTOR
ALL
42.070
44.070
2.0
2.0
2.0
13.45
19.59
0.000
0.350
STONE MASON
RLD
43.780
48.160
1.5
1.5
2.0
10.05
14.43
0.000
1.030
SURVEY WG KFR
->
NOT
IN
EFFECT
ALL
37.000
3'7.750
1.5
1.5
2.0
12.97 9.930 0.000 0,500
TERRAZZO FINISHER
SLD
38.040
0.000
1.5
1,5
2.0
10.55
11.22
0.000
0.720
TERRAZZO MASON
BLD
41.880
44.880
1.5
1.5
2.0
10.55
12.51
0.000
0.940
TILE MASON
BLD
43.840
47.840
1.5
1.5
2,0
10.55
11.40
0.000
0.990
TRAFFIC SAFETY WRKR
HWY
32.750
34.350
1.5
1.5
2.0
6.550
6.450
0.000
0.500
TRUCK DRIVER
E
ALL
1
35.480
35.680
1.5
1.5
2.0
8.350
10.50
0.000
0.150
TRUCK DRIVER
E
ALL
2
34.100
34.500
1.5
1.5
2.0
8.150
8.500
0.000
0.150
TRUCK DRIVER
E
ALL
3
34.300
34.500
1.5
1.5
2.0
8.150
8.500
0.000
0.150
'?RUCK DRIVERE
ALL
4
34,500
34.500
1.5
1.5
2.0
8.150
8.500
0.000
0.150
TRUCK DRIVER
W
ALL
1
35.600
35.800
1.5
1.5
1.5
8.250
9,140
0.000
O.i50
TRUCK DRIVER
W
ALL
2
32.700
33.100
1.5
i.5
2.0
6.500
4.350
0.000
0.000
TRUCK DRIVER
W
ALL
3
32.900
33.100
1.5
1.5
2.0
6.500
4,350
0.000
0.000
TRUCK DRIVER
W
ALL
4
33.100
33.100
1.5
1.5
2.0
6.500
4.350
0.000
0.000
TUCKPOINTER
BLD
43.800
44.800
1.5
1.5
2.0
B,280
13.59
0.000
0.670
Legend: RG {Region}
TYP (Trade Type - All,Highway,Building,Eloa:ing,0i1 d Chip,Riversj
APPENDIX 1
C (class)
Base (Base Wage Rate)
FRMAN (Foreman Rate)
M -F>8 (OT required for any hour greater than 8 worked each day, Mon through Fri.
OSA (Overtime (OT) is required for every hour worked on Saturday}
OSH {Overtime is required for every hour worked on Sunday and Holidays)
H/W (Health 5 Welfare Insurance)
Pensn (Pension)
Vac {Vacation)
Trng (Training)
Explanations
COOK COUNTY
The following list is considered as those days for which holiday rates
of wages for work performed apply: New Years Day, Memorial Day,
Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and
Veterans Day in some classifications/counties. Generally, any of
these holidays which fall on a Sunday is celebrated on the following
Monday. This then makes work performed on that Monday payable at the
appropriate overtime rate for holiday pay. Common practice in a given
local may alter certain days of celebration. If in doubt, please
check with IDOL.
TRUCK DRIVERS (WEST) - That part of the county West of Barrington
Road.
EXPLANATION OF CLASSES
ASBESTOS - GENERAL - removal of asbestos material/mold and hazardous
materials from any place in a building, including mechanical systems
where those mechanical systems are to be removed. This includes the
removal of asbestos materials/mold and hazardous materials from
ductwork or pipes in a building when the building is to be demolished
at the time or at some close future date.
ASBESTOS - MECHANICAL - removal of asbestos material from mechanical
systems, such as pipes, ducts, and boilers, where the mechanical
systems are to remain.
CEP,AMIC TILE FINISHER
The grouting, cleaning, and polishing of all classes of tile, whether
for interior or exterior purposes, all burned, glazed or unglazed
products; all composition materials, granite tiles, warning detectable
tiles, cement tiles, epoxy composite materials, pavers, glass,
mosaics, fiberglass, and all substitute materials, for tile made in
tile -like units; all mixtures in tile like form of cement, metals, and
other materials that are for and intended for use as a finished floor
surface, stair treads, promenade roofs, walks, walls, ceilings,
swimming pools, and all other places where tile is to form a finished
interior or exterior. The mixing of all setting mortars including but
not limited to thin --set mortars, epoxies, wall mud, and any other
sand and cement mixtures or adhesives when used in the preparation,
installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials.
The handling and unloading cf all sand, cement, lime, tile,
fixtures, equipment, adhesives, or any other materials to be used in
the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or
similar materials. Ceramic Tile Finishers shall fill all joints and
APPENDIX 1
voids regardless of method on all tile work, particularly and
especially after installation of said tile work. Application of any
and all protective coverings to all types of tile installations
including, but not be limited to, all soap compounds, paper products,
tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, masonite, cardboard,
and any new type of products that may be used to protect tile
installations, Blastrac equipment, and all floor scarifying equipment
used in preparing floors to receive tile. The clean up and removal of
all waste and materials. All demolition of existing tile floors and
walls to be re -tiled.
COMMUNICATIONS ELECTRICIAN
Installation, operation, inspection, maintenance, repair and service
of radio, television, recording, voice sound vision production and
reproduction, telephone and telephone interconnect, facsimile, data
apparatus, coaxial, fibre optic and wireless equipment, appliances and
systems used for the transmission and reception of signals of any
nature, business, domestic, commercial, education, entertainment, and
residential purposes, including but not limited to, communication and
telephone, electronic and sound equipment, fibre optic and data
communication systems, and the performance of any task directly
related to such installation or service whether at new or existing
sites, such tasks to include the placing of wire and cable and
electrical power conduit or other raceway work within the equipment
room and pulling wire and/or cable through conduit and the
installation of any incidental conduit, such that the employees
covered hereby can complete any job in full.
MARBLE FINISHER
Loading and unloading trucks, distribution of all materials (all
stone, sand, etc.), stocking of floors with material, performing all
rigging for heavy work, the handling of all material that may be
needed for the installation of such materials, building of
scaffolding, polishing if needed, patching, waxing of material if
damaged, pointing up, caulking, grouting and cleaning of marble,
holding water on diamond or Carborundum blade or saw for setters
cutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation of
material, drilling of holes for wires that anchor material set by
setters, mixing up of molding plaster for installation of material,
mixing up thin set for the installation of material, mixing up of sand
to cement for the installation of material and such other work as may
be required in helping, a Marble Setter in the handling of all
material in the erection or installation of interior marble, slate,
travertine, art marble, serpentine, alberene stone, blue stone,
granite and other stones (meaning as to stone any foreign or domestic
materials as are specified and used in building interiors and
exteriors and customarily known as stone in the trade), carrara,
sanionyx, vitrolite and similar opaque glass and the laying of all
marble tile, terrazzo tile, slate tile and precast tile, steps, risers
treads, base, or any other materials that may be used as substitutes
for any of the aforementioned materials and which are used on interior
and exterior which are installed in a similar manner.
MATERIAL TESTER I: Hand coring and drilling for testing of materials;
field inspection of uncured concrete and asphalt.
APPENDIX 1
MATERIAL TESTER II: Field inspection of welds, structural steel,
fireproofing, masonry, soil, facade, reinforcing steel, formwork,
cured concrete, and concrete and asphalt batch plants; adjusting
proportions of bituminous mixtures.
OPERATING ENGINEER - BUILDING
Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Spreader; Autograde; Backhoes with
Caisson Attachment; Batch Plant; Benoto (requires Two Engineers);
Boiler and Throttle Valve; Caisson Rigs; Central-Redi-Mix Plant;
Combination Back Hoe Front End -loader Machine; Compressor and Throttle
Valve; Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete
Conveyor (Truck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27E cu. ft; Concrete
Paver 27E cu. ft. and Under: Concrete Placer; Concrete Placing Boom;
Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted); Concrete Tower; Cranes, All; Cranes,
Hammerhead; Cranes, (GC1 and similar Type); Creter Crane; Spider
Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, All; Derricks, Traveling;
Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grouting
Machines; Heavy Duty Self -Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover;
Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader 2-1/4 yd. and over; Hoists,
Elevators, outside type rack and pinion and similar machines; Hoists,
One, Two and Three Drum; Hoists, Two Tugger One Floor; Hydraulic
Backhoes; Hydraulic Boom Trucks; Hydro Vac (and similar equipment);
Locomotives, All; Motor Patrol; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators;
Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Post Hole Digger; Pre -Stress Machine; Pump
Cretes Dual Ram; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes--Screw Type Pumps; Gypsum
Bulker and Pump; Raised and Blind Hole Drill; Roto Mill Grinder;
Scoops - Tractor Drawn; Slip -Form Paver; Straddle Buggies; Operation
of Tie Back Machine; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom and Side Boom;
Trenching Machines.
Class 2. Boilers; Broom, All Power Propelled; Bulldozers; Concrete
Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Forklift Trucks;
Highlift Shovels or Front Endloaders under 2-1/4 yd.; Hoists,
Automatic; Hoists, Inside Elevators; Hoists, Sewer Dragging Machine;
Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Laser Screed; Rock Drill (Self -Propelled);
Rock Drill (Truck Mounted); Rollers, All; Steam Generators; Tractors,
All; Tractor Drawn Vibratory Roller; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame.
Class 3. Air Compressor; Combination Small Equipment Operator;
Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hoists, Inside Elevators (remodeling
or renovation work); Hydraulic Power Units (Pile Driving, Extracting,
and Drilling); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300
ft.); Low Boys; Pumps, Well Points, Welding Machines (2 through 5);
Winches, 4 Small Electric Drill Winches.
Class 4. Bobcats and/or other Skid Steer Loaders; Oilers; and Brick
Forklift.
Class 5. Assistant Craft Foreman.
Class 6. Gradall.
Class 7. Mechanics; Welders.
APPENDIX I
OPERATING ENGINEERS - HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Class 1, Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Heater and Planer Combination; Asphalt
Heater Scarfire; Asphalt Spreader; Autograder/GOMACO or other similar
type machines: ABG Paver; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Ballast
Regulator; Belt Loader; Caisson Rigs; Car Dumper; Central Redi-Mix
Plant; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine, (1 cu. yd. Backhoe
Bucket or over or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (Truck
Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Paver over 27E cu. ft.; Concrete
Placer; Concrete Tube Float; Cranes, all attachments; Cranes, Tower
Cranes of all types: Creter Crane: Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.;
Derricks, All; Derrick Boats; Derricks, Traveling; Dredges;
Elevators, Outside type Rack & Pinion and Similar Machines; Formless
Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader,
Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, Form Grader, Pull Grader, Subgrader; Guard
Rail Post Driver Truck Mounted; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Heavy
Duty Self -Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover; Hydraulic Backhoes;
Backhoes with shear attachments up to AQ' of boom reach; Lubrication
Technician; Manipulators; Mucking Machine; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig;
Pre -Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Rock Drill - Crawler or Skid
Rig; Rock Drill - Truck Mounted; Rock/Track Tamper; Roto Mill
Grinder; Slip -Form Paver; Snow Melters; Soil Test Drill Rig (Truck
Hiounted); Straddle Buggies; Hydraulic Telescoping Form (Tunnel);
Operation of Tieback Machine; Tractor Drawn Belt Loader; Tractor
Drawn Belt Loader (with attached pusher - two engineers); Tractor with
Boom; Tractaire with Attachments; Traffic Barrier Transfer Machine;
Trenching; Truck Mounted Concrete Pump with Boom; Raised or Blind Hole
Drills (Tunnel Shaft); Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines 5
ft. in diameter and over tunnel, etc; Underground Boring and/or Mining
Machines under 5 ft. in diameter; Wheel Excavator; Widener (APSCO).
Class 2. Batch Plant; Bituminous Mixer; Boiler and Throttle Valve;
Bulldozers; Car Loader Trailing Conveyors; Combination Backhoe Front
Endloader Machine (Less than 1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with
attachments); Compressor and Throttle Valve; Compressor, Common
Receiver (3); Concrete Breaker or Hydro Hammer; Concrete Grinding
Machine; Concrete Mixer or Paver 7S Series to and including 27 cu.
ft. Concrete Spreader; Concrete Curing Machine, Burlap Machine,
Belting Machine and Sealing Machine; Concrete Wheel Saw; Conveyor Muck
Cars (Haglund or Similar Type); Drills, All; Finishing Machine --
Concrete; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader; Hoist - Sewer Dragging
Machine; Hydraulic Boom Trucks (All Attachments); Hydro -Blaster; Hydro
Excavating (excluding hose work); Laser Screed; All Locomotives,
Dinky; Off -Road Hauling Units (including articulating) Non
Self -Loading Ejection Dump; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes - Screw Type
Pumps, Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Roller, Asphalt; Rotary Snow Plows;
Rototiller, Seaman, etc., self-propelled; Self -Propelled Compactor;
Spreader - Chip - Stone, etc.; Scraper - Single/Twin Engine/Push and
Pull; Scraper - Prime Mover in Tandem (Regardless of Size); Tractors
pulling attachments, Sheeps Foot, Disc, Compactor, etc.; Tug Boats,
Class 3. Boilers; Brooms, All Power Propelled; Cement Supply Tender;
Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over);
Conveyor, Portable; Farm -Type Tractors Used for Mowing, Seeding, etc.;
Forklift Trucks; Grouting Machine; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, All
Elevators; .Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Jeep Diggers; ;.low Boys; Pipe
APPENDIX I
Jacking Machines; Post -Hole Digger; Power Saw, Concrete Power Driven;
Pug Mills; Rollers, other than Asphalt; Seed and Straw Blower; Steam
Generators; Stump Machine; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame; Work Boats;
Tamper -Form -Motor Driven.
Class 4. Air Compressor; Combination - Small Equipment Operator;
Directional Boring Machine; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hydraulic
Power Unit (Pile Driving, Extracting, or Drilling); Light Plants, All
(I through 5); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300
ft.); Pumps, Well Points; Vacuum Trucks (excluding hose work); Welding
Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 Small Electric Drill Winches.
Class 5. SkidSteer Loader (all); Brick Forklifts; Oilers.
Class 6. Field Mechanics and Field Welders
Class _�. Dowell Machine with Air Compressor; Gradall and machines of
like nature.
OPERATING ENGINEER - FLOATING
Class 1. Craft Foreman; Master Mechanic; Diver/Wet Tender; Engineer;
Engineer (Hydraulic Dredge).
Class 2. Crane/Backhoe Operator; Boat Operator with towing
endorsement; Mechanic/Welder; Assistant Engineer (Hydraulic Dredge);
Leverman (Hydraulic Dredge); Diver Tender,
Class 3. Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman, Maintenance of Crane
(over 50 ton capacity) or Backhoe (115,000 lbs. or more); Tug/Launch
Operator; Loader/Dozer and like equipment on Barge, Breakwater Wall,
SLIP/Dock, or Scow, Deck Machinery, etc.
Class 4. Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman/Fireman (4 Equipment
Units or More); Off Road Trucks; Deck Hand, Tug Engineer, Crane
Maintenance (50 Ton Capacity and Under) or Backhoe Weighing (115,000
pounds or less); Assistant Tug Operator.
Class 5. Friction or Lattice Boom Cranes.
Class 6. ROV Pilot, ROV Tender
SURVEY WORKER - Operated survey equipment including data collectors,
G.P.S. and robotic instruments, as well as conventional levels and
transits.
TERRAZZO FINISHER
The handling of sand, cement, marble chips, and all other materials
that may be used by the Mosaic Terrazzo Mechanic, and the mixing,
grinding, grouting, cleaning and sealing of all Marble, Mosaic, and
Terrazzo work, floors, base, stairs, and wainscoting by hand or
machine, and in addition, assisting and aiding Marble, Masonic, and
Terrazzo Mechanics.
TRAFFIC SAFETY
APPENDIX 1
Work associated with barricades, horses and drums used to reduce lane
usage on highway work, the installation and removal of temporary lane
markings, and the installation and removal of temporary road signs.
TRUCK DRIVER - BUILDING, HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION - EAST & WEST
Class 1. Two or three Axle Trucks. A -frame Truck when used for
transportation purposes; Air Compressors and Welding Machines,
including those pulled by cars, pick-up trucks and tractors;
Ambulances; Batch Gate Lockers; Batch Hopperman; Car and Truck
Washers; Carry -ails; Fork Lifts and Hoisters; Helpers; Mechanics
Helpers and Greasers; Oil Distributors 2 -man operation; Pavement
Breakers; Pole Trailer, up to 40 feet; Power Mower Tractors;
Self-propelled Chip Spreader; Skipman; Slurry Trucks, 2 -man operation;
Slurry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man; Teamsters; Unskilled
Dumpman; and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights, barricades, and
portable toilets on the job site.
Class 2. Four axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adaetors under 7 yards;
Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnapulls or
Turnatr.ailers when pulling other than self -loading equipment or
similar equipment under 16 cubic yards; Mixer Trucks under 7 yards;
Ready -mix Plant Hopper Operator, and Winch Trucks, 2 Axles.
Class 3. Five axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors 7 yards and over;
Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnatrailers or
turnapulls when pulling other than self -loading equipment or similar
equipment over 16 cubic yards; Explosives and/or Fission Material
Trucks; Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobile Cranes while in transit;
Oil Distributors, 1 -man operation; Pole Trailer, over 40 feet; Pole
and Expandable Trailers hauling material over 50 feet long; Slurry
trucks, 1 -man operation; Winch trucks, 3 axles or more;
Mechanic --Truck Welder and Truck Painter.
Class 4. Six axle trucks; Dual-purpose vehicles, such as mounted
crane trucks with hoist and accessories; Foreman; Master Mechanic;
Self -loading equipment like P.B, and trucks with scoops on the front.
Other Classifications of Work:
For definitions of classifications not otherwise set out, the
Department generally has on file such definitions which are
available. If a task to be performed is not subject to one of the
classifications of pay set out, the Department will upon being
contacted state which neighboring county has such a classification anc
provide such rate, such rate being deemed to exist by reference in
this document. If no neighboring county rate applies to the task,
the Department shall undertake a special determination, such special
determination being then deemed to have existed under this
determination. If a project requires these, or any classification not
listed, please contact IDOL at 217-782-1710 for wage rates or
clarifications.
LANDSCAPING
Landscaping work falls under the existing classifications for laborer,
operating engineer and true). driver. The wort: performed by
APPENDIX 1
landscape plantsman and landscape laborer is covered by the existing
classification of laborer. The work performed by landscape operators
(regardless of equipment used or its size) is covered by the
classifications of operating engineer. The work performed by
landscape truck drivers (regardless of size of truck driven) is
covered by the classifications of truck driver.
MATERIAL TESTER & MATERIAL TESTER/INSPECTOR I AND II
Notwithstanding the difference in the classification title, the
classification entitled "Material Tester I" involves the same job
duties as the classification entitled "Material Tester/Inspector 1".
Likewise, the classification entitled "Material Tester II" involves
the same job duties as the classification entitled "Material
Du Pate County PrevailinLy Wage for July 2015
(See expAnabon of column headings at bottom of wages)
Trade Name
RG TYP
C Base
FRMiAN
M -F>8
OSA
OSH
H/W
Pensn
Vac
Trng
ASBESTOS ABT -GEN
ALL
39.400
39.950
1.5
1.5
2.0
13.98
10.72
0.000
0.500
ASBESTOS ABT -MEC
BLD
36.340
38.840
1.5
1.52.0
11.47
10.96
0.000
0.720
BOILERMAKER
BLD
47.070
51.300
2.0
2.0
2.0
6.970
18.13
0.000
0.400
BRICK MASON
BLD
43.780
48.160
1.5
1.5
2.0
10.05
14.43
0.000
':_,030
CARPENTER
ALL
44.350
46.350
1.5
1.5
2.0
13.29
16.39
0.000
0.630
CEMENT MASON
ALL
43.750
45.750
2.0
1.5
2.0
13.05
14.45
0.000
0.480
CERAMIC TILE
FNSHER
BLD
36.810
0.000
1.5
1.5
2.0
10.55
9.230
0.000
0.770
COMMUNICATION
TECH
BLD
32.650
34.750
1.5
1.5
2.0
9.550
15.16
1.250
0.610
ELECTRIC PWR
EQMT OP
ALL
37.890
51.480
1.5
1.5
2.0
5.000
11.75
0.000
0.380
ELECTRIC PWR
EQMT OP
HWY
39.220
53.290
1.5
1.5
2.0
5.000
12.17
0.000
0.390
ELECTRIC PWR
GRNDMAN
ALL
29.300
51.480
1.5
1.5
2.0
5,000
9.090
0.000
0.290
ELECTRIC PWR
GRNDMAN
HWY
30.330
53.290
1..5
1.5
2.0
5.000
9.400
0.000
0.300
ELECTRIC PWR
LINEMAN
ALL
45.360
51.480
1.5
1.5
2.0
5.000
14.06
0.000
0.450
ELECTRIC PWR
LINEMAN
HWY
46.950
53.290
1.5
1.5
2.0
5.000
14.56
0.000
0.470
ELECTRIC PWR
TRK DRV
ALL
30.340
51.480
1.5
1.5
2.0
5.000
9.400
0.000
0.300
ELECTRIC PWR
TRK DRV
HWY
31.400
53.290
1.5
1.5
2.0
5.000
9.730
0.000
0.310
ELECTRICIAN
BLD
38.160
41.980
1.5
1.5
2.0
9.550
18.25
4.680
0.680
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR
0.600
FENCE ERECTOR
0.300
FENCE ERECTOR
0.700
GLAZIER
0.940
HT/FROST INSULATOR
0.720
IRON WORKER
0.350
IRON WORKER
0.700
LABORER
0.500
LATHER
0.630
MACHINIST
0.000
MARBLE, FINISHERS
0.600
MARBLE MASON
0.780
MATERIAL TESTER I
0.500
MATERIALS TESTER II
0.500
MILLWRIGHT
0.630
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
':.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
1.250
ALL
BLD
50.800
57.150
2.0
NE
ALL
37.340
39.340
1.5
W
ALL
45.060
4B.660
2.0
1.5
BLD
40.500
42.000
1.5
ALL
SLD
48.450
50.950
1.5
E
ALL
44.200
46.200
2.0
W
ALL
45.060
48.660
2.0
ALL
39.200
39.950
1.5
ALL
44.350
46.350
1.5
BLD
45.350
47,850
1.5
ALL
31.400
32.970
1.5
BLD
4.3.030
47.330
1.5
ALL
29.200
0.000
1.5
ALL
34.200
0.000
1.5
ALL 44.350 46.350 1.5
BLD 1 48.100 52.100 2.0
BLD 2 46.800 52.100 2.0
BLD 3 44.250 52.100 2.0
BLD 4 42.500 52.100 2.0
BLD 5 51.850 52.100 2.0
BLD 6 49.100 52.100 2.0
BLD 7 51.100 52.2.00 2.0
FLT 36.000 36.000 1.5
HWY 1 46.300 50.300 1.5
HWY 2 45.750 50.300 1.5
HWY 3 43.700 50.300 1.5
HWY 4 42.300 50.300 1.5
HWY 5 41.100 50.300 1.5
APPENDIX 1
2.0
2.0
13.57
14.21
9.060
1.5
2.0
13.05
12.06
0.000
2.0
2.0
10.52
20.76
0.000
2.0
2.0
13.14
16.99
0.000
1.5
2.0
11.47
12.16
0.000
2.0
2.0
13.65
21.1.4
0.000
2.0
2.0
10.52
20.76
0.000
1.5
2.0
13.98
10.72
0.000
1.5
2.0
13.29
16.39
0.000
1.5
2.0
7.260
8.950
1.850
1.5
2.0
9.850
13.10
0.000
1.5
2.0
10.05
14.10
0.000
1.5
2.0
13.98
10.72
0.000
1.5
2.0
13.98
10.72
0.000
1.5
2.0
13.29
16.39
0.000
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1..900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
2.0
2.0
17,55
12,65
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.10
11.80
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
1.5
2.0
17.55
1.2.65
1.900
1.5
2,0
1.7.55
12.65
1.900
APPENDIX 1
OPERATING ENGINEER
HWY
6
49.300
50,300
1.5
L.5
2.0
17.55
12.65
11.900
1.250
OPERATING ENGINEER
HWY
7
47.300
50.300
1.5
1.5
2.0
17.55
12.65
1.900
1.250
ORNAMNTL IRON WORKER
E
ALL
45.000
47.500
2.0
2.0
2,0
13.55
17.94
0.000
0.650
ORNAMNTL IRON WORKER
W
ALL
45.060
48.660
2.0
2.0
2.0
10.52
20.76
0.000
0.700
PAINTER
ALL
41,730
43,730
1,5
1.5
1,5
10.30
8.200
0.000
1.350
PAINTER SIGNS
BLD
33.920
38.090
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.600
2.710
0.000
0.000
PILEDRIVER
ALL
44,350
46.350
1.5
1,5
2,0
13.29
16,39
0.000
0.630
PIPEFITTER
BLD
46.000
49.000
1.5
1.5
2.0
9.000
15.85
0.000
1.7 BO
PLASTERER
BLD
41.250
43.760
1.5
1.5
2.0
9.700
13.08
0.000
0.980
PLUMBER
BLD
46.650
48.650
1.5
1.5
2.0
13.18
11.46
0.000
0.880
ROOFER
BLD
41.000
44.000
1.5
1.5
2.0
B.280
10.54
0.000
0.530
SHEETMETAL WORKER
BLD
44.720
46.720
1.5
1.5
2.0
10.65
13.31
0.000
0.820
SPRINKLER FITTER
BLD
49.200
51.200
1.5
1.5
2.0
1.1.75
9.650
0.000
0.550
STEEL ERECTOR
E
ALL
42.070
44.070
2.0
2.0
2.0
13.45
19,59
0.000
0.350
STEEL ERECTOR
W
ALL
45.060
48.660
2.0
2.0
2.0
10.52
20.76
0.000
0.700
STONE MASON
BLD
43.780
48,160
1.5
1.5
2,0
10,05
14,43
0.000
1.030
SURVEY WGR iEpl
>
NOT
IN
EFFECT
ALL
37.000
37.750
1.5
1.5
2.0
12.97 9.930 0.000 0.500
TERRAZZO FINISHER
BLD
38.040
0.000
1,5
1.5
2.0
10.55
11.22
0,000
0.720
TERRAZZO MASON
BLD
41.880
44.880
1.5
1.5
2.0
10.55
12.51
0.000
0.940
TILE MASON
BLD
42.840
46.840
1.5
1.5
2.0
10.55
10.42
0.000
0.920
TRAFFIC SAFETY WRKR
HWY
32.750
34.350
1.5
1.5
2.0
6.550
6.450
0.000
0.500
TRUCK DRIVER
ALL
1
35.920
36.120
1.5
1.5
2.0
8.280
8.760
0.000
0.150
TRUCK DRIVER
ALL
2
32.700
33.100
1.5
1.5
2.0
6.500
4.350
0.000
0,150
TRUCK DRIVER
ALL
3
32.900
33.100
1,5
1.5
2.0
6.500
4.350
0.000
0.150
TRUCK DRIVER
ALL
4
33.100
33.100
1.5
1.5
2.0
6.500
4.350
0.000
0.150
TUCKPOINTER
BLD
42.620
43.620
11.5
1.5
2.0
10.05
13.34
0.000
0.670
Legend: RG (Region)
TYP (Trade Type - All, Highway, Building, Floating, Oil & Ch -p, Rivers
C (C],ass)
Base (Base WaUe. Rate)
FRMAN (Foreman Rate)
APPENDIX 1
M -F>8 (OT required for any hour greater than B worked each day, Mon through Fri.
OSA (Overtime {OT) is required for every hour worked on Saturday)
OSH (Overtime is required for every hour worked on Sunday and Holidays)
H/W (Health G Welfare Insurance)
Pensn (Pension)
Vac (Vacation)
Trng (Training)
Explanations
DUPAGE COUNTY
IRON WORKERS AND FENCE ERECTOR (WEST) - West of Route 53.
The following list is considered as those days for which holiday .rates
of wages for work performed apply: New Years Day, Memorial Day,
Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and
Veterans Day in some classifications/counties. Generally, any of
these holidays which fall on a Sunday is celebrated on the following
Monday. This then makes work performed on that Monday payable at the
appropriate overtime rate for holiday pay. Common practice in a given
local may alter certain days of celebration. If in doubt, please
check with IDOL.
EXPLANATION OF CLASSES
ASBESTOS - GENERAL - removal of asbestos material/mold and hazardous
materials from any place in a building, including mechanical systems
where those mechanical systems are to be removed. This includes the
removal of asbestos materials/mold and hazardous materials from
ductwork or pipes in a building when the building is to be demolished
at the time or at some close future date.
ASBESTOS - MECHANICAL - removal of asbestos material from mechanical
Systems, such as pipes, ducts, and boilers, where the mechanical
systems are to remain.
TRAFFIC SAFETY - work associated with barricades, horses and drums
used to reduce lane usage on highway work, the installation and
removal of temporary lane markings, and the installation and removal
of temporary road signs.
CERAMIC TILE FINISHER
The grouting, cleaning, and polishing of all classes of tile, whether
for interior or exterior purposes, all burned, glazed or unglazed
products; all composition materials, granite tiles, warning detectable
tiles, cement tiles, epoxy composite materials, pavers, glass,
mosaics, fiberglass, and all substitute materials, for tile made in
tile -like units; all mixtures in tile like form of cement, metals, and
other materials that are for and intended for use as a finished floor
surface, stair treads, promenade roofs, walks, walls, ceilings,
swimming pools, and all other places where file is to form a finished
interior or exterior. The mixing of all setting mortars including but
not limited to thin -set mortars, epoxies, wal. mud, and any other
sand and cement mixtures or adhesives when used in- the preparation,
installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials.
The handling and unloading of all sand_, cement, lime, tile,
APPENDIX 1
fixtures, equipment, adhesives, or any other materials to be used in
the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or
similar materials. Ceramic Tile Finishers shall fill all joints and
voids regardless of method on all tile work, particularly and
especially after installation of said tile work. Application of any
and all protective coverings to all types of tile installations
including, but not be limited to, all soap compounds, paper products,
tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, masonite, cardboard,
and any new type of products that may be used to protect tile
installations, Blastrac equipment, and all floor scarifying equipment
used in preparing floors to receive tile. The clean up and removal of
all waste and materials. All demolition of existing tile floors and
walls to be re -tiled.
COMMUNICATIONS TECflNTCIAN
Low voltage installation, maintenance and removal of telecommunication
facilities (voice, sound, data and video) including telephone and
data inside wire, interconnect, terminal equipment, central offices,
PABX, fiber optic cable and equipment, micro waves, V -SAT, bypass,
CATV, WAN (wide area networks), LAN (local area networks), and ISDN
(integrated system digital network), pulling of wire in raceways, but
not the installation of raceways.
KARBLE FINISHER
Loading and unloading trucks, distribution of all materials (all
stone, sand, etc.), stocking of floors with material, performing all
rigging for heavy work, the handling of all material that may be
needed for the installation of such materials, building of
scaffolding, polishing if needed, patching, waxing of material if
damaged, pointing up, caulking, grouting and cleaning of marble,
holding water on diamond or Carborundum blade or saw for setters
cutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation of
material, drilling of holes for wires that anchor material set by
setters, mixing up of molding plaster for installation of material,
mixing up thin set for the installation of material, mixing up of sand
to cement for the installation of material and such other work as may
be required in helping a Marble Setter in the handling of all
material in the Erection or installation of interior marble, slate,
travertine, art marble, serpentine, alberene stone, blue stone,
granite and other stones (meaning as to stone any foreign or domestic
materials as are specified and used in building interiors and
exteriors and customarily known as stone in the trade), carrara,
sanionyx, vitrolite and similar opaque glass and the laying of all
marble tile, terrazzo tile, slate tile and precast tile, steps, risers
treads, base-, or any other materials that may be used as substitutes
for any of the aforementioned materials and which are used on interior
and exterior which are installed in a similar manner.
t✓MATERIAL TESTER L: Hand coring and drilling for testing of materials;
field inspection of uncured concrete and asphalt.
MATERIAL, TESTER II: Field inspection of welds, structural steel,
fireproofing, masonry, soil, facade, reinforcing steel, formwork,
cured concrete, and concrete and asphalt ba -.ch plants; adjusting
proportions of bituminous mixtures.
APPENDIX ]
OPERATING ENGINEER - BUILDING
Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Spreader; Autograde; Backhoes with
Caisson Attachment; Batch Plant; Denote (requires Two Engineers);
Boiler and Throttle Valve; Caisson Rigs; Central Redi-Mix Plant;
Combination Back Hoe Front End -loader Machine; Compressor and Throttle
Valve; Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete
Conveyor {Truck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27E cu. ft; Concrete
Paver 27E cu. ft. and Under: Concrete Placer; Concrete Placing Boom;
Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted); Concrete Tower; Cranes, All; Cranes,
Hammerhead; Cranes, (GCI and similar Type); Creter Crane; Spider
Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, All; Derricks, Traveling;
Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grouting
Machines; Heavy Duty Self -Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover;
Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader 2-1/4 yd. and over; Hoists,
Elevators, outside type rack and pinion and similar machines; Hoists,
One, Two and Three Drum; Hoists, Two Tugger One Floor; Hydraulic
Backhoes; Hydraulic Boom Trucks; Hydro Vac (and similar equipment);
Locomotives, All; Motor Patrol; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators;
Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Post Hole Digger; Pre -Stress Machine; Pump
Cretes Dual Ram; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type Pumps; Gypsum
Bulker and Pump; Raised and Blind Hole Drill; Roto Mill Grinder;
Scoops - Tractor Drawn; Slip -Form Paver; Straddle Buggies; Operation
of Tie Back Machine; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom and Side Boom;
Trenching Machines.
Class 2. Boilers; Broom, All Power Propelled; Bulldozers; Concrete
Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Forklift Trucks;
Highlift Shovels or Front Endloaders under 2-1/4 yd.; Hoists,
Automatic; Hoists, Inside Elevators; Hoists, Sewer Dragging Machine;
Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Laser Screed; Rock Drill (Self -Propelled);
Rock Drill (Truck Mounted); Rollers, All; Steam Generators; Tractors,
All; Tractor Drawn Vibratory Roller; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame.
Class 3. Air Compressor; Combination Small Equipment Operator;
Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hoists, Inside Elevators (remodeling
or renovation work); Hydraulic Power Units (Pile Driving, Extracting,
and Drilling); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300
ft.); Low Boys; Pumps, Well Points; Welding Machines (2 through 5);
Winches, 4 Small Electric Drill Winches.
Class 4. Bobcats and/or other Skid Steer Loaders; Oilers; and Brick
Forklift.
Class 5. Assistant Craft Foreman.
Class 6. Gr.adall.
Class 7. Mechanics; Welders.
OPERATING ENGINEERS - HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Heater and Planer Combination; Asphalt
Heater Scarfire; Asphalt Spreader; Autograder/GOMACO or other similar
type machines: ABG Paver; Backhoes with Caisson Attachment; Ballast
APPENDIX 1
Regulator; Belt ILoader; Caisson Rigs; Car Dumper; Central Redi-Mix
Plant; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine, (1 cu. yd. Backhoe
Bucket or over or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (Truck
Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Paver over 27E cu. ft.; Concrete
Placer; Concrete Tube Float; Cranes, all attachments; Cranes, Tower
Cranes of all types: Creter Crane: Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.;
Derricks, All; Derrick Boats; Derricks, Traveling; Dredges;
Elevators, Outside type Rack & Pinion and Similar Machines; Formless
Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader,
Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, Form Grader, Pull Grader, Subgrader; Guard
Rail Post Driver Truck Mounted; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Heavy
Duty Self -Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover; Hydraulic Backhoes;
Backhoes with shear attachments up to 40' of boom reach; Lubrication
Technician; Manipulators; Mucking Machine; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig;
Pre -Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Rock Drill - Crawler or Skid
Rig; Rock Drill - Truck Mounted; Rock/Track Tamper; Roto Mill
Grinder; Slip -Form Paver; Snow Melters; Soil Test Drill Rig (Truck
Mounted); Straddle Buggies; Hydraulic Telescoping Form (Tunnel);
Operation of Tieback Machine; Tractor Drawn Belt Loader; Tractor
Drawn Belt Loader (with attached pusher - two engineers); Tractor with
Boom; Tractaire with Attachments; Traffic Barrier Transfer Machine;
Trenching; Truck Mounted Concrete Pump with Boom; Raised or Blind Hole
Drills (Tunnel Shaft); Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines 5
ft. in diameter and over tunnel, etc; Underground Boring and/or Mining
Machines under 5 ft. in diameter; Wheel Excavator; Widener (APSCO).
Class 2. Batch Plant; Bituminous Mixer; Boiler and Throttle Valve;
Bulldozers; Car Loader Trailing Conveyors; Combination Backhoe Front
Endloader. Machine (Less than 1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with
attachments); Compressor and Throttle Valve; Compressor, Common
Receiver (3); Concrete Breaker or Hydro Hammer; Concrete Grinding
Machine; Concrete Mixer or Paver 7S Series to and including 27 cu.
ft.; Concrete Spreader; Concrete Curing Machine, Burlap Machine,
Belting Machine and Sealing Machine; Concrete Wheel Saw; Conveyor Muck
Cars (Haglund or Similar Type); Drills, All; Finishing Machine -
Concrete; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader; Hoist -- Sewer Dragging
Machine; Hydraulic Boom Trucks (All Attachments); Hydro -Blaster; Hydro
Excavating (excluding hose work); Laser Screed; All Locomotives,
Dinky; Off -Road Hauling Units (including articulating) Non
Self -Loading Ejection Dump; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes - Screw Type
Pumps, Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Roller, Asphalt; Rotary Snow Plows;
Rototiller, Seaman, etc., self-propelled; Self -Propelled Compactor;
Spreader - Chip - Stone, etc.; Scraper - Single/Twin Engine/Push and
Pull; Scraper - Prime Mover in Tandem (Regardless of Size); Tractors
pulling attachments, Sheeps Foot, Disc, Compactor, etc.; Tug Boats.
Class 3. Boilers; Brooms, All Power Propelled; Cement Supply Tender;
Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over);
Conveyor, Portable; Farm -Type Tractors Used for Mowing, Seeding, etc.;
Forklift Trucks; Grouting Machine; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, All
Elevators; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Jeep Diggers; Low Boys; Pipe
Jacking Niach_ines; Post -Hole Digger; Power Saw, Concrete Power Driven;
Pug Mills; Rollers, other than Asphalt; Seed and Straw Blower; Steam
Generators; Stump Machine; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame; Work Boats;
Tamper. -Form --Motor Driven.
Class 4. Air Compressor; Combination - Small Equipment Operator;
APPENDIX 1
Directional Boring Machine; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hydraulic
Power Unit (Pile Driving, Extracting, or Driiling); Light Plants, All
(1 through 5); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300
ft.); Pumps, Well Points; Vacuum Trucks (excluding hose work); Welding
Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 Small Electric Drill Winches.
Class 5. SkidSteer Loader (all); Brick Forklifts; Oilers.
Class 6. Field Mechanics and Field Welders
Class 7. Dowell Machine with Air Compressor; Gradall and machines of
like nature.
OPERATING ENGTNEER - FLOATING
Diver. Diver Wet Tender, Diver Tender, ROV Pilot, ROV Tender
SURVEY WORKER - Operated survey equipment including data collectors,
G.P.S. and robotic instruments, as well as conventional levels and
transits.
TRUCK DRIVER - BUILDING, HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Class 1. Two or three Axle Trucks, A -frame Truck when used for
transportation purposes; Air Compressors and Welding Machines,
including those pulled by cars, pick-up trucks and tractors;
Ambulances; Batch Gate Lockers; Batch Hopperman; Car and Truck
Washers; Carry -alis; Fork Lifts and Hoisters; Helpers; Mechanics
Helpers and Greasers; Oil Distributors 2 ---man operation; Pavement
Breakers; Pole Trailer, up to 40 feet; Power Mower Tractors;
Self-propelled Chip Spreader; Skipman; Slurry Trucks, 2 -man
operation; Slurry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man; Teamsters;
Unskilled Dumpman; and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights,
barricades, and portable toilets on the job site.
Class 2. Four axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors under 7 yards;
Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnapulls or
Turnatrailers when pulling other than self -loading equipment or
similar equipment under 16 cubic yards; Mixer Trucks under 7 yeards;
Ready -mix Plant Hopper Operator, and Winch Trucks, 2 Axles.
Class 3. Five axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors 7 yards and over;
Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnatrailers or
turnapulls when pulling other than self --loading equipment or similar
equipment over 16 cubic yards; Explosives and/or Fission Material
Trucks; Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobile Cranes while in transit;
Oil Distributors, 1 -man operation; Pole Trailer, over 40 feet; Pole
and Expandable Trailers hauling material over 50 feet long; Slurry
trucks, 1 -man operation; Winch trucks, 3 axles or more;
Mechanic --Truck Welder and Truck Painter.
Class 4. Six axle trucks; Dual-purpose vehicles, such as mounted
crane trucks with hoist and accessories; Foreman; Master Mechanic;
Self. -loading equipment like P.B. and trucks with scoops on the front.
APPENDIX 1
TERRAZZO FINISHER
The handling of sand, cement, marble chips, and all other materials
that may be used by the Mosaic Terrazzo mechanic, and the mixing,
grinding, grouting, cleaning and sealing of all Marble, Mosaic, and
Terrazzo work, floors, base, stairs, and wainscoting by hand or
machine, and in addition, assisting and aiding Marble, masonic, and
Terrazzo Mechanics.
Other Classifications of Work:
For definitions of classifications not otherwise set out, the
Department generally has on file such definitions which are available.
If a task to be performed is not subject to one of the
classifications of pay set out, the Department will upon being
contacted state which neighboring county has such a classification and
provide such rate, such rate being deemed to exist by reference in
this document. If no neighboring county rate applies to the task,
the Department shall undertake a special determination, such special
determination being then deemed to have existed under this
determination. If a project requires these, or any classification not
listed, please contact IDOL at 217-782-1710 for wage rates or
clarifications.
LANDSCAPING
Landscaping work falls under the existing classifications for laborer,
operating engineer and truck driver. The work performed by landscape
plantsman and landscape laborer is covered by the existing
classification of laborer. The work performed by landscape operators
(regardless of equipment used or its size) is covered by the
classifications of operating engineer. The work performed by
landscape truck drivers (regardless of size of truck driven) is
covered by the classifications of truck driver.
MATERIAL TESTER & HkTERIAL TESTER/INSPECTOR I AND II
Notwithstanding the difference in the classification title, the
classification entitled "Material Tester I" involves the same jcb
duties as the classification entitled "material Tester/Inspector I"
Likewise, the classification entitled "material Tester II" involves
the same job duties as the classification entitled "Material
APPENDIX 2
PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
[insert contractor name and address here:]
as Principal (hereinafter called the "Contractor'') and
[insert surety name and address here:]
, organized and existing under the laws of the State of
(hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto Village of Oak
Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, as the obligee (hereinafter called the "Owner"), in
the full and _just sum of [insert full contract price here:] $ for the
payment of which sum of money well and truly to be made, the Contractor and the Surety bind
themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents, said amount to include payment of actual costs and damages and for
attorneys' fees, architectural fees, design fees, engineering fees, accounting fees, testing fees,
consulting fees, administrative costs, court costs, interest and any other fees and expenses resulting
from or incurred by reason of the Contractor's failure to promptly and faithfully perform its contract
with the Owner, said contract being more fully described below, and to include attorneys' fees, court
costs and administrative and other expenses necessarily paid or incurred in successfully enforcing
performance of the obligation of the Surety under this bond.
WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written agreement dated [insert contract date
here:] 201_, with the Owner titled [insert contract title here:]
" (the
"Contract"), the terms and conditions of which are by this reference incorporated herein as though
fully set forth herein.
NOVit, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION 1S SUCH THAT if the
Contractor shall well, truly, and promptly perform all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions,
and agreements of the Contractor under the contract, including but not limited to the Contractor's
obligations under the Contract; (1) to provide, perform, and complete at the Work Site and in the
manner specified in the Contract all necessary Work, labor, services; transportation, equipment,
materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and
other means and items necessary for [insert general description of the Work here:]
(2) to procure and furnish all permits, licenses, and other governmental
approvals and authorizations necessary in connection therewith [except as otherwise expressly
provided in the Attachment A of the Contract]; (3) to procure and furnish all bonds, certificates, and
policies of insurance specified in the Contract; (4) to pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes;
(5) to do all other things required of the Contractor by the Contract; and (6) to provide, perforin, and
complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner and in full compliance with, and as
required by and pursuant to, the Contract; all of which is herein referred to as the "Work" whether or
not an-,, of the Work enter into and become component parts of the improvement contemplated, then
this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
APPENDIX 2
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, modifications,
alterations, omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances on the part of the
Owner or the Contractor to the other in or to the terms of said Contract; in or to the schedules, plans,
drawings, or specifications: in or to the method or manner of performance of the Work; in or to
Owner -furnished facilities, equipment, material, service, or site; or in or to the mode or manner of
payment therefore shall in any way release the Contractor and the Surety or either or any of them, or
any of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, or affect the obligations of the
Surety on this bond, all notice of any and all of the foregoing changes, modifications, alterations,
omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances and notice of any and all defaults
by the Contractor or of the Owner's termination of the Contractor being hereby waived by the Surety.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the foregoing paragraph, in no event shall the
obligations of the Surety under this bond in the event of the Contractor's default be greater than the
obligations of the Contractor under the Contract in the absence of the Contractor default.
In the event of a default or defaults by the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to take
over and complete the Contract on 30 calendar days' written notice to the Surety, in which event the
Surety shall pay the Owner all costs incurred by the Owner in taking over and completing the
Contract.
At its option, the Owner may instead request that the Surety take over and complete the
Contract, in which event the Surety shall take reasonable steps to proceed promptly with completion
no later than 30 calendar days after the date on which the Owner notifies the Surety that the Owner
wants the Surety to take over and complete the Contract.
The Owner shall have no obligation to actually incur any expense or correct any deficient
performance of the Contractor to be entitled to receive the proceeds of this bond.
No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other
than the Owner or the heirs, executors, administrators, or successors of the Owner.
Signed and sealed this day of
Attest/Witness:
By:
Title:
Attest/Witness:
By:
Title:
?01—
PRINCIPAL
By
By:
SURETY
By:
By:
APPENDIX 3
LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
[insert contractor name and address here:]
as Principal (hereinafter called the "Contractor") and
[insert surety name and address here:]
, organized and existing under the laws of the State of
(hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto Village of Oak
Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, as the obligee (hereinafter called the "Owner"), for
the use and benefit of itself and of claimants as hereinafter defined (the "Claimants") in the full and
just sum of [insert full contract price here:] $ to be paid to the Owner or
the Claimants or the Owner's or the Claimant's assigns, to which payment well and truly to be made
the Contractor and the Surety bind themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors,
and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents, said amount to include attorney's fees,
court costs, and administrative and other expenses necessarily paid or incurred in successfully
enforcing performance of the obligation of the Surety under this bond.
WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written agreement dated [insert contract date
here:] 201—, with the Owner titled [insert contract title here:]
" (the "Contract"),
the terms and conditions of which are by this reference incorporated herein as though fully set forth
herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT if the
Contractor shall promptly pay at- cause to be paid all sums of money that may be due to any Claimant
with respect to the Contractor's obligations under the Contract: (1) to provide, perform, and complete
at the Work Site and in the manner specified in the Contract all necessary Work, labor, services,
transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste
disposal, information, data and other means and items necessary for [insert general description of the
Work here:]
(2) to procnre and furnish all permits;
licenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in connection therewith
lexcept as otherivise expresso, provided its Attachment A to the Contract]; (3) to procure and furnish
all Bonds and all certificates and policies of insurance specified in the Contract; (4) to pay all
applicable federal, state, and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required of the Contractor by the
Contract; and (6) to provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike
manner and in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, the Contract; all of which is
herein referred to as the "Work," whether or not any of said Work enter into and become component
parts of the improvement contemplated, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall
remain in full force and effect.
For purpose of this bond, a Claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the
Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to provide, perform, or complete any part of the
Work.
The Contractor and the Surety hereby jointly and severally agree that ever), Claimant that has
not had all just claims for the furnishing of any part of the Work paid in full, including without
limitation all claims for amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, rentals of or service or
repairs on machinery, equipment, and tools consumed or used in connection with the furnishing of any
APPENDIX 3
part of the Work, may sue on this bond for the use of that Claimant, may prosecute the suit to final
judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due that Claimant, and may have execution therein;
provided, however, that the Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any
such suit. The provisions of 30 ILCS 55011 and 2 of the Illinois Compiled Statutes shall be deemed
inserted herein, including the time limits within which notices of claim must be filed- and actions
brought under this bond.
The Contractor and the Surety hereby jointly agree that the Owner may sue on this bond if the
Owner is held liable to, or voluntarily agrees to pay, any Claimant directly, but nothing in this bond
shall create any duty on the part of the Owner to pay any Claimant.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, modifications,
alterations, omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances on the part of the
Owner or the Contractor to the other in or to the terms of the Contract; in or to the schedules, plans,
drawings, or specifications; in or to the method or manner of performance of the Work; in or to
Owner -furnished facilities, equipment, material, service, or site; or in or to the mode or manner of
payment therefor shall in an), way release the Contractor and the Surety or either or any of them, or
any of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, or affect the obligations of the
Surety on this bond, all notice of any and all of the foregoing changes, modifications, alterations,
omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances and notice of any and all defaults
by the Contractor or of the Owner's termination of the Contractor being hereby waived by the Surety.
Signed and sealed this day of 201
Attest/Witness: CONTRACTOR
NO
Title:
AttestI)A7itness:
By:
Title:
#34920193 v2
By: _
By! —
SURETY
By: _
By: